135i Convertible (2008) - Automobile BMW - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free 135i Convertible (2008) BMW in PDF.
| Product Type | Automobile |
| Model | 135i Convertible (2008) |
| Manufacturer | BMW |
| Engine | 3.0L Inline-6 Turbocharged (N54) |
| Horsepower | 300 hp @ 5800 rpm |
| Torque | 300 lb-ft @ 1400-5000 rpm |
| Transmission | 6-speed manual or 6-speed automatic with Steptronic |
| Drivetrain | Rear-wheel drive |
| Fuel Type | Premium unleaded |
| Fuel Capacity | Approx. 15.8 gallons |
| Seating Capacity | 4 passengers |
| Convertible Top | Fully automatic power soft top; operation up to 25 mph |
| Length | 173.4 in |
| Width | 68.8 in |
| Height | 55.4 in |
| Wheelbase | 104.7 in |
| Curb Weight | Approx. 3,570 lbs |
| Safety Systems | Airbags (front, side, head), Dynamic Stability Control (DSC), Antilock Brake System (ABS), Flat Tire Monitor, Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) |
| Convenience Features | iDrive, Navigation system, BMW Assist, Cruise control, Rain sensor, Automatic climate control, Heated seats, Park Distance Control (PDC), Convenient access, Memory seats |
| Entertainment | AM/FM radio, CD player, CD changer (optional), Satellite radio (optional), AUX-In port, USB-audio interface |
| Lighting | Xenon headlamps, Adaptive Head Light (optional), Fog lamps, Reading lamps, Pathway lighting |
| Service Interval | Condition Based Service (CBS); oil change reminder based on driving conditions |
Frequently Asked Questions - 135i Convertible (2008) BMW
User questions about 135i Convertible (2008) BMW
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your Automobile in PDF format for free! Find your manual 135i Convertible (2008) - BMW and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. 135i Convertible (2008) by BMW.
USER MANUAL 135i Convertible (2008) BMW
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
The Ultimate Driving Machine
Contents A to Z
128i Owner's Manual for Vehicle
135i Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical features. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 014 954
US English II/08, 08 03 500
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a particular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 244.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
6 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
23 Voice command system
Controls
28 Opening and closing
45 Adjustments
55 Transporting children safely
58 Driving
67 Everything under control
81 Technology for driving comfort and safety
92 Lamps
97 Climate
103 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
114 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
122 Starting the navigation system
123 Destination entry
136 Destination guidance
146 What to do if ...
Entertainment
150 On/off and settings
154 Radio
160 Satellite radio
163 CD player and CD changer
169 AUX-In port
170 USB-audio interface
Communications
176 Telephoning
191 BMW Assist
Mobility
202 Refueling
204 Wheels and tires
212 Under the hood
217 Maintenance
219 Care
223 Replacing components
229 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
236 Technical data
240 Short commands for the voice command system
244 Everything from A-Z
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your BMW center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, can also be found on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.
Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.
Marks the end of a specific item of information.
* Indicates special equipment, country-specific equipment and optional extras, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.
...< Verbal instructions to use with the voice command system.
)....Identifies the answers generated by the voice command system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for information on a particular part or assembly.
The individual vehicle
When you ordered your BMW, you chose various items of equipment. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equipment available with a specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may contain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections describing options and special equipment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehicle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accompanying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and powerful electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. You should therefore have the corresponding work on your vehicle performed only by your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information.
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warranties:
▶ New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
▶ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
▶ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
California Emission Control System Limited Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries, or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the control concepts and options available for operating the various systems.
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Convertible: opening and closing windows jointly 38
2 Convertible: opening and closing rear windows 38
3 Opening and closing front windows 38
4 Folding exterior mirrors in and out * 51
5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb monitor* 51
6 EDO Parking lamps 92
Parking lamps 92
Low beams 93
Automatic headlamp control* 92 Adaptive Head Light* 94
7
Fog lamps* 95
8
Turn signals 62
High beams, headlamp flasher 94
Roadside parking lamps* 94
Computer 68
Settings and information about the vehicle 71
Settings and information about the vehicle 71
Instrument lighting 95
9 Instrument cluster 12
10
Windshield wipers 63
Rain sensor* 63
11
Switching the ignition on/off and starting/stopping the engine 58
12
Ignition lock 58
13
Buttons on the steering wheel
Telephone*:
Press: accepting and ending a call; starting dialing* of selected phone number; redialing if no phone number is selected.
Press longer: redialing
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice command system*
Changing radio station Selecting music track Scrolling through phone book and lists with stored phone numbers
Individually programmable 53
Individually programmable 53
14 Horn: the entire surface
15 Adjusting the steering wheel 53
16
Cruise control* 65
17 Releasing the hood 212
18 Opening the luggage compartment lid 33
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
135i: with fuel gauge
2 Indicator lamps for turn signals
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Tachometer 67
5 Fuel gauge 68
135i: engine oil temperature 68
6 Display for
Clock 67
Outside temperature 67
Indicator and warning lamps 77
7 Display for
Position of automatic transmission* 60
Computer 68
Date of next scheduled service, and remaining distance to be driven 72
▶ Odometer and trip odometer 67
▶ Checking oil level 213
▶ Settings and information 71
8 Resetting the trip odometer 67
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps in the display area can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.
Some lamps are checked for proper functioning and thus come on briefly when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the lower edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.
You can call up more information, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 77.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that certain functions are active:
High beams/headlamp flasher 94
Fog lamps* 95
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the propulsive forces in order to maintain driving stability 83
Canada: parking brake applied 59
Parking brake applied 59
Canada: engine malfunction with adverse effect on exhaust emissions 218
Engine malfunction with adverse effect on exhaust emissions 218
Around the center console: controls and displays
1 Coupe: microphone for voice command system* and for telephone in hands-free mode* Convertible: microphone on steering column
2 SOS: initiating an Emergency Request call* 229
3 Reading lamps * 96
4 Coupe: glass roof, electric * 39
5 Interior lamps 95
6 Passenger airbag status lamp 90
7 Control Display 16
8 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 83
9 Hazard warning flashers
10 Central locking system 32
11 Automatic climate control
Air distribution to the windshield 98
Air distribution to the upper body area 98
Air distribution to the footwell 98
Automatic air distribution and flow rate 99
Cooling function 100
Automatic recirculated-air control AUC 99
Recirculated-air mode 99
Maximum cooling 98
Residual heat mode 100
Air flow rate 99
Defrosting windows 100
Rear window defroster 100
12 Ejecting audio CD 150
13 Changing
Radio station 150
Track 150
14 Selecting radio, CD and CD changer
15 Selecting AM or FM waveband
16 Ejecting navigation DVD
17
Heated seats* 49
Convertible: opening the convertible top 41
Convertible: closing the convertible top 41
18 Controller 16
Can be turned, pressed, or moved horizontally in four directions
19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
20 Drive for navigation DVD* 122
21 Programmable memory keys 21
22 Switching entertainment audio sources on/off and adjusting volume 150
23 Drive for audio CD 163
iDrive
iDrive integrates the functions of a large number of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a single central position. The following section provides an introduction to
basic menu navigation. The control of the individual functions is described in connection with the relevant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 button
Opening start menu
3 Controller
The controller can be used to select menu items and to adjust settings:
Move in four directions, arrow 4
Turn, arrow 5
▶ Push, arrow 6
Operate the controller only when traffic and road conditions allow this, to avoid endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.
Menu overview
Communication
Telephone*
BMW Assist* or BMW TeleServices*
Navigation
▶ Navigation system
Onboard information, e.g. for displaying the average fuel consumption
Entertainment
Radio
CD player and CD changer*
AUX-In port, USB-audio interface* for external audio device
Climate
▶ Vent settings
▶ Automatic programs
Parked car operation
i menu
Closing the screen
▶ Tone and display settings
▶ Traffic information settings
Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central locking system
▶ Display of service requirements and dates for statutory inspections
▶ Settings for telephone
Operating principle
As of radio readiness, the following message appears on the Control Display:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
The start menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after approx. 10 seconds.
Start menu
All iDrive functions can be called up via five menu items.
Opening start menu
Press the MENOH.
To open the start menu from the i menu:
Press the MENU twice.
Calling up menu items in the start menu
![graph TD A["Climate"] --> B["Entertainment"] C["Communication"] --> B D["Navigation"] --> B E["Global"] --> B F["Global"] --> B G["Global"] --> B H["Global"] --> B I["Global"] --> B J["Global"] --> B K["Global"] --> B L["Global"] --> B M["Global"] --> B N["Global"] --> B O["Global"] --> B P["Global"…](/content/2026/05/1019009/images/051c5ebf2a343bfc3a92c452c1b680a10a21574c40b9fda170be34e6a87c24b2.jpg)
As of radio readiness, refer to page 58:
Via the start menu you can call up the four menu items of Communication, Navigation, Entertainment and Climate by moving the controller forwards, backwards, to the left or to the right.
You can call up the i menu by pressing the controller.
Convenient call-up of menu items
The convenient call-up function enables you to:
▶ Call up a menu item from the start menu in the view last displayed.
Switch directly between Communication, Navigation, Entertainment and Climate without having to press the MEN.
To do so, move the controller in the corresponding direction and hold it for more than approx. 2 seconds.
Displays in menu
1 Each menu is subdivided into fields. The active field is highlighted.
2 A symbol indicates the start menu item last selected.
Communication
Navigation or onboard information
Entertainment
Climate
i menu
1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizontal or vertical lists.
2 In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility of accessing other menu items that are not currently visible.
3 Settings are represented graphically or as numerical values.
Operating principle at a glance
The following is a general description of operations using iDrive. For an exemplary step-by-step application, refer to page 75.
![graph TD A["Menu item 3"] --> B["Settings"] B --> C["Menu item 4"] C --> D["Menu item 5"] D --> E["Menu item 6"] E --> F["Menu item 7"] F --> G["Menu item 8"] G --> H["Menu item 9"] H --> I["Menu item 3"] I --> J["Settings"] J --> K["Menu item 4"] K --> L["Menu item 5"] L --> M["Menu item 6"] M -->…](/content/2026/05/1019009/images/2a147298cf104ce65ac7fe8a450317c199e3ee8e8f2871eefbd0322b5220539d.jpg)
1 Selecting a menu item:
Turn the controller; the highlight marker moves
Menu items in white can be selected by highlighting them
2 Activating a menu item:
Press the controller
New menu items are displayed or the function is executed
3 Selecting a menu item: refer to 1
4 Switching between fields:
▶ Briefly move the controller to the left, right, forward, or backward
Release the controller
The active field is brighter in color
5 Adjusting settings:
Turn the controller
▶ Graphic display, numerical value or text displays can be changed
▶ Confirm by changing the field
Status information
1 Display for:
Entertainment: Radio, CD or
Telephone* in "Communication": Name of the connected mobile phone, network search or no network
"BMW Assist*: Active voice connection with a BMW Assist service
2 Entertainment audio output off
3 Display for traffic information * : "TI":
Traffic information for the navigation system can be received and transmission is switched on
4 Display for:
New entries present in "Missed calls"*
Roaming active
5 It is possible to make calls * if the mobile phone is paired with the vehicle Reception strength of mobile phone network, display depending on mobile phone
6 Time
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during Check Control message displays or entries via the voice command system*.
Closing/opening the screen
Do not place objects in the vicinity of the open screen, otherwise the screen may be damaged.
Closing the screen
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu. - Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Close display" and press the controller.
You can also close the screen manually.
Opening the screen
Press the controller.
Setting the conditions for opening the screen automatically
You can select the events that cause the screen to open automatically.
- Open the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Display settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Display" and press the controller.
The various conditions are shown on the Control Display.
- Select the desired conditions and press the controller:
When there is an incoming call: "Call"
When an important Check Control message is displayed: "Check Control message"
When there is a navigation system message:
"Navigation info"
When the voice command system is started:
"Speech input"
When the ignition is switched on: "Ignition on"
When the Park Distance Control is displayed:
"PDC Display on"
The condition is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Programmable memory keys
Using the programmable memory keys, you can store and execute certain iDrive functions:
▶ Navigation* destinations
Entertainment:
Radio stations
CD
CD compartment of CD changer
AUX
Telephone: phone numbers
The assignment of the programmable memory keys is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Storing functions
Navigation* destinations
- Select the navigation destination, e.g. in the destination list or address book.
- ... Press the key longer than 2 seconds.
Special features of the Professional navigation system:
If destination guidance and the map view have been started, the current destination is stored.
If the destination is entered via map, the coordinates in the cross-hairs are stored, not the current destination.
Telephone, phone numbers
- Enter the phone number or select the number from a list of stored phone numbers, e.g. the A-Z list.
- ... Press the key longer than 2 seconds.
If the phone number is associated with a name, the name is also stored.
Entertainment
The item stored in the Entertainment menu is the source that is playing at the time of storage,
e.g. a radio station, irrespective of what was selected on the Control Display.
- Select the desired function, e.g. radio station or CD.
- ... Press the key longer than 2 seconds.
If the car is equipped with two drives and a CD with compressed audio files is played, the current track is stored.
Executing a function
... Press the key.
The function is executed immediately. This means that, for example, if a phone number is selected, the connection is established, or if a navigation destination is called up, destination guidance is started.
Displaying memory key assignments
You can have the assignment of a memory key displayed by touching the key with your finger. Please do not wear gloves when doing so. Touching the keys with an object such as a pen will not work.
Displaying brief information
1 ... Touch the key.
The key assignment is displayed.
Navigation destination
Entertainment source
Telephone, phone number
- Not assigned
Displaying detailed information
1 ... Touch the key for a longer period.
Clearing key assignments
- Press the MENOH
This opens the start menu. - Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
- Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and press the controller.
-
Select "Delete assignment of all memory keys" and press the controller.
-
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Voice command system*
The concept
The voice command system allows you to control operation of various vehicle systems without removing your hands from the steering wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands. It is not necessary to use the controller.
The voice command system transforms your oral commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions.
The voice command system uses a special microphone located in the area of the interior rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Precondition
Via iDrive, select the language in which the voice command system is operating, so that the spoken commands can be identified. Selecting the language for iDrive, refer to page 80.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
... ( Say the specified commands word for word.
»...« Indicates responses of the voice command system.
Saying commands
Activating voice command system
- Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and a signal indicate that the voice command system is ready to receive spoken commands.
- Say the command.
Text or digits that are understood by the voice command system are displayed on the Control Display.
This symbol appears on the Control Display when you can enter additional commands.
If no further commands are possible, continue by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice command system
Press the button on the steering wheel or
Cancel
Commands
Having the possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read aloud the possible commands related to the selected menu item on the Control Display.
To have the possible commands read out to you:
Options
For instance, if you have selected "CD", the commands available for operating the CD player and CD changer* are read out.
Opening help
Help<
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:
Radio on< or >Turn radio on<
Calling up functions immediately via short commands
Short commands enable you to perform certain functions immediately, irrespective of which menu item is selected, refer to page 240.
Opening the start menu
Main menu<
Example: selecting a track
- If necessary, switch on entertainment audio output.
-
Press the button on the steering wheel.
-
»Entertainment«. The system says: »Entertainment«.
-
CD(. The system says:
CD on(<<.
- Press the button on the steering wheel.
- Select a track, e.g.:
Track 1<.
The system says:
)Track 1
Notes
For information on voice control of the telephone, refer also to the separate
Owner's Manual.
For voice commands, bear in mind the following:
▶ Pronounce the commands and digits smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses. The same applies to spelling when entering a destination for navigation.
Always speak the commands in the language of the voice command system.
When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name.
For entries in the voice-activated phone book, only use names in the language of the voice command system and no abbreviations.
Keep the doors, windows and glass roof closed to prevent interference from outside noise.
Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with information for complete control of your vehicle.
All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience, are described here.
Opening and closing
Remote control
Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries' charge status. In cars with convenient access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 37.
The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car, refer to Personal Profile below.
In addition, information about service requirements is stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in the remote control, page 217.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
Driver's door, refer to page 32
Convertible: glove compartment, refer to page 106
Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 33
New remote controls
Your BMW center can supply new remote controls with integrated keys as additional units or as replacements in the event of loss.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set many of your BMW's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Without any action on your part, Personal Profile ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the car, the remote control used for the purpose is recognized and the settings stored for it are called up and implemented.
This means that your personal settings will be activated for you, even if in the meantime your car was used by someone else with another remote control and the corresponding settings. The individual settings are stored for a maximum of four remote controls. They are stored for two remote controls if convenient access* is in use.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer to the specified pages.
Assignment of programmable memory keys, refer to page 21
Response of the central locking system when the car is unlocked, refer to page 29
▶ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 32
Automatic call-up* of the driver's seat position after unlocking, refer to page 49
▶ Programming buttons* on the steering wheel, refer to page 53
Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 63
▶ Settings for the display on the Control Display and in the instrument cluster:
12h/24h format of the clock, refer to page 76
Date format, refer to page 77
Brightness of Control Display, refer to page 80
Language of Control Display, refer to page 80
Units of measure for fuel consumption, distance covered/remaining distances, and temperature, refer to page 71
Show visual warning for Park Distance Control PDC, refer to page 81
Light settings:
▶ Welcome lamps, refer to page 92
▶ Pathway lighting, refer to page 93
Daytime running lamps, refer to page 93
▶ Automatic climate control: AUTO program, cooling function and automatic recirculated-air control activation/deactivation, temperature, air flow rate and distribution, refer to page 98
Entertainment:
▶ Audio volume, refer to page 151
▶ Tone control, refer to page 151
▶ Speed-dependent volume control, refer to page 151
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:
Doors
Luggage compartment lid
▶ Fuel filler door
Operating from outside
Via the remote control
Via the door lock
In cars with convenient access*, via the handles on the driver's and front passenger's doors
The anti-theft system is also operated at the same time. It prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or door handles. In addition, if the remote control is used, the welcome lamps*, interior lamps and the door's courtesy lamps* are switched on or off. The alarm system* is also armed or disarmed. For further details on the alarm system *, refer to page 34.
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking, refer to page 32.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and interior lamps come on.
Opening and closing: Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps* and the welcome lamps come on.
Setting unlocking characteristics
You can set whether only the driver's door or the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the button is pressed for the first time.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the buttal
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Central locking" and press the controller.
- Select "Unlock button" and press the controller.
- Select a menu item:
All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.
"Driver's door only"
Press the button once to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler door. Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.
- Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Coupe: convenient opening
Hold the button down.
The windows and the glass roof* are opened.
Convertible: convenient opening*
You can open the convertible top using the remote control for convenient access within a range of approx. 13 ft/4 m from the vehicle.
Hold the button down.
The windows and the convertible top are opened provided that the doors are closed.
If you continue pressing the button, the windows move up.
Watch during the opening process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing button interrupts the opening process.
Locking
Press the button.
Convertible: convenient closing*
You can close the convertible top and the windows using the remote control for convenient access within a range of approx. 13 ft/4 m from the vehicle.
Hold the button down.
The convertible top and the windows are closed.
Watch during the closing process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing button interrupts the closing process.
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc.
Unlocking the luggage compartment lid
Press the button for a longer period.
The luggage compartment lid opens a short distance, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.
The luggage compartment lid swings backward and up when opened. Ensure
that there is sufficient clearance.
To avoid locking yourself out by accident, do not place the remote control in the cargo bay.
A previously locked luggage compartment lid is locked again after closing.
Before and after each trip, check that the luggage compartment lid has not been inadvertently unlocked.
Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Open the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Confirmation" and press the controller.
-
Select the desired signal *.
-
Press the controller.
The signals are switched on.
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
In vehicles without an alarm system* or convenient access*, only the driver's door can be
unlocked and locked using the integrated key in the door lock.
When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed, you can lock and unlock both doors, the luggage compartment lid and the fuel filler door using the button for the central locking system in the interior, refer to page 32.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote control is discharged. Use the remote control on an extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to page 28. The remote control for convenient access contains a battery that may have to be changed, refer to page 37.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device must not cause harmful interference, and
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Opening and closing: Using the door lock
You can set the way in which the car is unlocked, refer to page 29.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an alarm system* or convenient access*, only the driver's door is locked via the door lock.
To lock both doors, the fuel filler door and the luggage compartment lid together:
- With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using the button for the central locking system in the interior, refer to page 32.
- Unlock and open the driver's or front passenger's door, refer to page 33.
- Lock the vehicle.
Lock the driver's door using the integrated key in the door lock, or
press down the lock button of the front passenger's door and close the door from the outside.
Convenient operation*
If the car is equipped with an alarm system* or convenient access*, you can also control the power windows and the glass roof* in the coupe or the convertible top in the convertible via the door lock.
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or locking.
During each closing procedure, and when opening the convertible top, watch the process and ensure that no one becomes trapped. Releasing the key stops the operation.
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the integrated key to the corresponding limit positions in the door lock.
Opening and closing: From inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the luggage compartment lid, but does not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the car locks:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Open the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
-
Select "Central locking" and press the controller.
-
Select a menu item:
"Relock door if not opened" The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle after some time if no door has been opened.
"Lock after driving"
The central locking system automatically locks the vehicle as soon as you drive off.
- Press the controller.
The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors
Either unlock the doors together using the button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or
pull on the door handle of each door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.
Locking
Use the central locking button to lock all of the doors simultaneously, or
press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.
Luggage compartment lid
In order to avoid damage, make sure there is sufficient clearance before opening the luggage compartment lid.
Opening from inside
Press the button: the luggage compartment lid opens unless it has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button, see arrow, or the button on the remote control for a longer period. The luggage compartment lid opens slightly and can be swung upward.
Opening manually
The integrated key of the remote control, refer to page 28, fits the luggage compartment lid lock.
If you open the luggage compartment lid using the key while the alarm system is armed, the alarm will be triggered. Switching off an alarm, refer to page 35.
Turn the key all the way to the left: the luggage compartment lid opens.
Locking or unlocking separately
The switch is located in the glove compartment.
1 Locking the luggage compartment lid
2 Unlocking the luggage compartment lid
Locking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.
The luggage compartment lid is locked and cannot be unlocked using the central locking system.
If you give the remote control without the integrated key to someone else while the glove compartment is locked, the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened. This is an advantage when using valet parking, for example.
Locking the glove compartment, refer to page 106.
Unlocking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo bay. The luggage compartment lid is unlocked.
Closing
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull down.
Make sure that the closing path of the luggage compartment lid is clear, other-
wise injuries may result.
Alarm system*
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
When a door, the hood or the luggage compartment lid is opened
To movements inside the vehicle: interior motion sensor, refer to page 35
When the car's inclination changes, for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away: tilt alarm sensor, refer to page 35
When there is an interruption in the power supply from the battery.
Depending on the national-market version, the alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry attempts by:
An acoustic alarm
Switching on* the hazard warning flashers
Arming and disarming
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the luggage compartment lid using the button of the remote control even if the alarm system is armed, refer to page 30. The lid is locked and monitored again as soon as it is closed.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button for at least three seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off an alarm
▷ Unlock the car with the remote control, refer to page 29, or
▶ insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.
Indicator lamp displays
The indicator lamp under the inside rearview mirror flashes continuously: the system is armed.
The indicator lamp flashes after locking: doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are
not properly closed. Even if you do not close the alerted area, the system begins to monitor the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and the tilt alarm sensor are not activated.
The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: your vehicle has not been disturbed while you were away.
If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed while you were away.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
Coupe
In order for the interior motion sensor to function properly, the windows and glass roof must be completely closed *.
Convertible
The interior of the car is monitored up to the height of the seat cushions. Thus the alarm system is activated together with the interior motion sensor even if the convertible top is open. The alarm can be triggered unintentionally by falling objects such as leaves, refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time. This prevents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following situations:
In duplex garages
During transport on car-carrying trains, boats/ships or on a trailer
When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subsequently locked again.
Convenient access*
Convenient access enables you to enter your vehicle without needing to hold the remote control in your hand. All you need to do is wear the remote control close to your body, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corresponding remote control within the immediate vicinity or in the passenger compartment.
Convenient access supports the following functions:
▶ Unlocking/locking the vehicle
▶ Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separately
Engine starting
▶ Convenient closure
Functional requirement
The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid can only be locked when the vehicle detects that the remote control currently in use is outside of the vehicle.
The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked again until after approx. 2 seconds.
The engine can only be started when the vehicle detects that the remote control currently in use is inside the vehicle.
Comparison to the standard remote control
In general, there is no difference between using convenient access or pressing the buttons on the remote control to carry out the functions mentioned above. You should therefore first familiarize yourself with the instructions on opening and closing starting on page 28.
Special features regarding the use of convenient access are described below.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing windows, the glass roof or the convertible top, the system is checking whether a remote control is inside the vehicle. Please repeat the opening or closing procedure, if necessary.
Unlocking
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front passenger's door completely, arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the ⚙ LOCK button.
To preserve the battery, please make sure that the ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off before locking the vehicle.
Coupe: convenient closure
For convenient closure, keep your finger on the surface, arrow 2.
Convertible: window and convertible top operation
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, you can open and close the windows and the convertible top when a remote control is located inside the vehicle.
Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separately
Press the button on the outside of the luggage compartment lid. This corresponds to pressing the 📄 button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote control has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's interior after the luggage compartment lid is closed, the lid will reopen. The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal* sounds.
Switching on radio readiness
Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the start/stop button, refer to page 58.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch, otherwise the engine will start immedi-
Starting the engine
You can start the engine or switch on the ignition when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote control into the ignition switch, refer to page 58.
Switching off the engine in cars with automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off when the selector lever is in position P, refer to page 59. To switch the engine off when the selector lever is in position N, the remote control must be in the ignition switch.
Before driving a vehicle with automatic transmission into a car wash
- Insert remote control into ignition switch.
- Depress the brake.
- Move the selector lever to position N.
- Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.
Malfunctions
Convenient access may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this happens, open and close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or using the integrated key. To start the engine afterward, insert the remote control into the ignition switch.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition switch.
The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is switched off, the engine can only be restarted within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and a message appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote control.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for convenient access contains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.
- Take the integrated key out of the remote control, refer to page 28.
- Remove the cover.
- Insert the new battery with the plus side facing up.
- Press the cover on to close.
Take the old battery to a battery collection point or to your BMW center.
Windows
To prevent injuries, watch the windows while closing them.
Take the remote control out of the ignition when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the electric windows and possibly injure themselves.
Coupe: opening, closing
Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.
Press the switch beyond the resistance point:
The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.
Convertible: opening, closing
Window operation with convenient access, refer also to page 30.
To close the side windows while driving, either close the rear windows first or all
four windows together, otherwise the windows may not close tightly at high speeds.
Individually
Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.
Press the switch beyond the resistance point:
The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot be closed automatically.
Jointly
Press the switch to the resistance point: All windows open as long as you press the switch.
Press the switch beyond the resistance point:
All windows open automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening movement.
▶ Pull the switch:
All windows close as long as you pull the switch.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off, you can still operate the windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has been opened.
Convenient operation
For information on convenient operation via the remote control or the door lock, refer to page 29 or 32. For information on closing with convenient access, refer to Locking on page 36.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a power window closes, the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the window's travel path prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing.
Do not install any accessories that might interfere with window movement. Otherwise the pinch protection system could be impaired.
Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them closely when closing to avoid personal injury.
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the windows, etc., prevents you from closing the windows normally, proceed as follows:
- Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.
- Pull the switch again past the resistance point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protection.
Coupe: glass roof*, electric
To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof while closing it.
Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the roof and possibly injure themselves.
Raising
Press the switch.
The closed glass roof is raised and the sliding visor opens slightly.
The open glass roof automatically travels into the raised position. The sliding visor remains completely open.
Do not close the sliding visor forcibly with the roof in the raised position, as this
would damage the mechanism.
Opening, closing
Press the switch backwards to the resistance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open together as long as you hold the switch in this position.
Press the switch backwards past the resistance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open automatically. Briefly press the switch again to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand. For information on convenient operation via the remote control or the door lock, refer to page 29 or 32. For information on closing with convenient access, refer to Locking on page 36.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off, you can still operate the roof
for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction during closing from approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or during closing from the raised position, the closing movement is interrupted and the glass roof is opened again slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the roof's travel path prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and the roof would continue closing.
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, press the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it there. The roof closes without pinch protection.
Following interruptions in electrical power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that the glass roof can only be raised. The system must be initialized. BMW recommends having this work done by your BMW center.
Closing manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can move the glass roof manually:
- Unclip the front of the cover of the interior lamps using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 223.
- On both sides, use the screwdriver to press on the clip inside the opening.
- Remove the control unit.
- Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort will be required for manual operation.
- Insert the Allen wrench * supplied with the onboard tool kit, refer to page 223, into the opening provided. Move the glass roof in the desired direction.
- Reattach the lamp cover and reinstall the control unit.
Convertible: top
The fully automatic top combines reliable weather protection with simple and convenient operation.
The following tips will enhance your driving pleasure in your convertible:
It is advisable that you close the convertible top when you park the vehicle. Not only does the closed top protect the vehicle interior against unanticipated weather damage, it also offers a certain amount of theft protection. However, even when the top is closed, valuables should only be stored in the locked cargo bay.
Do not attach roof-mounted luggage systems to the convertible top.
When opening a wet top, e.g. after driving in the rain, water may drip into the cargo bay. If necessary, remove items from the cargo bay beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.
At temperatures below +14 °F / -10 °C, do not move the convertible top or damage occur.
Do not keep the convertible top in the convertible top box for longer than one day if it is wet, otherwise the moisture may cause damage. Do not place objects on the convertible top, as otherwise they may fall off when you operate the convertible top and cause damage or injury. Never move the convertible top when the rollover protection system is in the activated position.
Always fully complete a convertible top movement. Driving with the convertible top incompletely opened or closed can result in damage or injury.
Do not reach into the mechanism during the opening or closing procedure. Keep children away from the opening/closing path of the convertible top.
For safety reasons, only move the convertible top when the vehicle is stationary, if possible.
The convertible top swings upward when opening and closing. When operating the convertible top in a garage, under a bridge, etc., ensure that there are at least 6 ft 7 in/2 m of headroom, otherwise the vehicle may be damaged.
Before opening and closing
Comply with the safety precautions described above.
▶ Ensure that the cargo bay partition is folded down and engaged on both sides, refer to page 109, otherwise it will not be possible to open the convertible top.
▶ Ensure that the cargo does not press against the cargo bay partition from below.
▶ Ensure that the luggage compartment lid is closed.
Opening and closing
Convertible top operation with convenient access, refer also to page 30.
As of radio readiness, refer to page 58:
If possible, conserve the battery by only operating the convertible top when the one is running.
Before closing the convertible top, remove all foreign objects from the windshield frame as these could prevent the hardtop from closing properly.
1 Push button: close convertible top
2 Push button: open convertible top
3 LEDs
The side windows move down slightly when the buttons for convertible top
operation are pressed.
Operation while driving
You can open or close the convertible top while driving, as long as the car is not moving faster than approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
If you accelerate to over 30 mph/50 km/h while the convertible top is moving, the procedure is interrupted.
When operating the convertible top while driving, pay extra attention to the traffic to avoid an accident. If possible, do not move the convertible top while driving in reverse gear, because your view to the rear is severely limited during the procedure. Do not operate the convertible top while driving in windy conditions. Do not drive faster than 30 mph/50 km/h, otherwise damage to the vehicle can occur.
LEDs
While the convertible top is being operated, the left LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as the top is fully opened or closed.
In the following situations, a message appears on the Control Display or an acoustic signal sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:
If the right-hand LED flashes red when you release the button, the opening or closing action has not yet finished.
If the right-hand LED lights up red when the button is pressed, the cargo bay partition is raised, the luggage compartment lid is not closed or there is a malfunction. The convertible top cannot be moved.
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is interrupted if the button for the convertible top operation is released. The sequence can be continued in the desired direction by pushing or pulling the buttons.
If the opening or closing procedure is interrupted for an extended period, the convertible top remains in the raised position for approx. 10 minutes and then slowly moves to a stable position.
A convertible top that is not fully opened or closed is a safety hazard.
If the convertible top is not fully opened or closed, the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened and the windows cannot be moved.
Convenient operation with remote control or via door lock
Refer to pages 30 and 32.
Closing manually
Only close the convertible top manually if it is absolutely necessary, and never open it manually. The convertible top box cover cannot be locked if there is an electrical defect and would then open while the vehicle is in motion. Incorrect handling can result in damage.
Closing the convertible top manually should be performed by two people. The rear seats must not be occupied.
Before closing
- If possible, close all windows and then lower the rear windows by approx. 3/4 in/2 cm. After you manually unlock the convertible top box cover, the windows can no longer be operated.
- Open the luggage compartment lid. If there is an electrical fault, unlock the lid using the integrated key, refer to page 33.
- Take the Allen wrench and screwdriver out of the onboard tool kit, refer to page 223.
-
Using the screwdriver, loosen the two buttons in the cargo bay, arrows 1, and pull them out forcefully as far as they will go. The convertible top box cover is unlocked.
-
Close the luggage compartment lid. After the convertible top box cover is unlocked manually, the luggage compartment lid can only be opened using the integrated key.
Closing
- Open the doors.
- Slide the protective cap, arrow 2, forward.
- Slowly and smoothly open the convertible top box cover all the way, arrow 3.
- The locking pins must have engaged completely. If they are still visible: close the convertible top box cover as far as necessary until the locking bolts engage audibly, then slowly open the cover. During this process, do not close the convertible top box cover completely.
- Lift out the front part of the convertible top, arrows 4, on both sides and swing it forward. At the same time keep the convertible top box cover from closing, e.g. using your shoulder.
- Position the rear convertible top frame upright, arrow 5, and close the convertible top box cover, arrow 6. Then lower the rear convertible top frame.
- Together with another person, press down the front convertible top frame from the outside and on both sides as far as possible.
- Carefully remove the cover in the center of the front convertible top frame using the screwdriver.
- Attach the handle of the screwdriver to the Allen wrench and insert the wrench into the opening provided.
- Turn the Allen wrench all the way to the left, arrow 7, until the front convertible top frame is locked to the windshield frame. The rear convertible top frame is automatically pressed down onto the convertible top box cover and is sealed tight under tension.
The closing procedure must be fully completed, otherwise damage or injury may occur.
Please contact your BMW center to have the cause of the malfunction eliminated.
Wind deflector
The wind deflector keeps air currents in the passenger compartment at a low level when the convertible top is down and provides for an even more pleasant journey at higher speeds.
Installation
- Remove the wind deflector from the protective cover and unfold it, arrows 1.
- Press together the top and bottom parts of the wind deflector until the catch engages, arrow 2.
- Position both locking pins of one side at the openings provided for them.
- Press the wind deflector into the openings, arrows 3, overcoming the tension in the springs, and push the free locking pin in the same direction, arrow 4.
- Position the free locking pins at the corresponding openings and let the spring ten-
sion lock the wind deflector in place, arrow 5.
- Fold up the top section of the wind deflector, arrow 6.
With the wind deflector installed: do not recline the front-seat backrests too far if the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this would damage the wind deflector.
Removing the wind deflector
Proceed in the reverse order as used for installation.
Folding
Slide the red release lever towards the middle of the wind deflector and push the two halves apart.
Adjustments
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In conjunction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an accident. To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the following section.
For additional information on transporting children safely, refer to page 55.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered off.
No one and nothing is to come between the airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.
Make sure that passengers do not lean their heads against the side or head airbag, otherwise serious injuries could result if the airbags suddenly deployed.
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circumstances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This effect is usually only temporary.
For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 89.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Othe, there is an increased risk of injury in the t of an accident.
Head restraints, refer to page 47.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low across the hips and does not press against the abdomen.
The safety belt must not rest against the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over hard or fragile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt so that it sits as snugly as possible against the lap and shoulder without being twisted. Otherwise the belt could slide over your hips and injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal collision. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise its restraining effect could be impaired.
Safety belts, refer to page 51.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could and with unexpected movement, and the turning loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection normally provided by the belt.
Comply with the instructions on head restraint height on page 47, and on damaged safety belts on page 51.
Manual adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions above to ensure the best possible per-protection.
Longitudinal direction
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired position.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently forward or back to make sure it engages properly.
Height
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Tilt*
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.
Thigh support*
Pull the lever and move the thigh support forward or back.
Electrical adjustment*
Observe the adjustment instructions above to ensure the best possible per-protection.
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle
4 Backrest
The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer to Head restraints on page 47.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive supplementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.
Increase or decrease curvature: press the switch at the front or rear, respectively.
Shift curvature up or down: press the switch at the top or bottom, respectively.
Backrest width*
You can change the width of the backrest to suit your individual preferences by adjusting the lateral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch. Backrest width decreases or increases accordingly.
To move the front seats forward or backward from outside or from one of the rear seats: with the door open, press the front end 1 or rear end 2 of the switch.
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. Only remove a head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in question. Reinstall the head restraint before transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise,
the passenger will be without protection from the head restraint.
Front seats
Height adjustment
To raise: pull up.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.
Removing
- Pull it up as far as it will go.
- Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out.
Rear seats
Coupe: height adjustment
To raise: pull up.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.
Convertible: raising and lowering
Only lower the head restraints if there are no passengers in the rear. Raise all lowered head restraints before transporting passengers in the rear.
To raise: pull up.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down, arrow 2.
Removing
- Pull it up as far as it will go.
- Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out.
Coupe: folding head restraint down and up*
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, it may contain foldable head restraints.
Folding down:
Press the button, arrow 1.
Folding up:
Pull the head restraint.
Only fold down the head restraints if there are no passengers in the rear. Fold up the head restraints again before transporting passengers in the rear.
Seat with manual longitudinal adjustment
Convenient entry
The convenient entry feature includes a memory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.
- Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
- Push the seat forward.
Previous position
Push the seat backward and swing the backrest back.
When pushing the seat into its rearmost position, make sure that no one is injured and that no objects are damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and backrests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected movement.
Seat with electrical longitudinal adjustment
Convenient entry
The convenient entry feature includes a memory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.
- Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
- Press the front end 2 of the switch until the seat has moved into the desired position.
Previous position
Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat automatically stops in its previous position, and fold the backrest back. If you release the switch before the previous seat position is reached, the seat will stop at its current position.
When sliding the seat backward, make sure no one is injured and no objects are aged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and backrests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected movement.
Heated seats*
Press once for each temperature level. Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
To switch off:
Press button longer.
If you continue driving within approx.
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is switched off entirely to save on battery power. The LEDs stay lit.
Seat and mirror memory*
You can store and call up two different combinations of driver's-seat and exterior-mirror positions.
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Storing
- Switch on radio readiness or the ignition, refer to page 58.
- Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired positions.
- Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up.
- Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the LED goes out.
Call-up
Do not call up memory while you are driving, otherwise unexpected seat movement could result in an accident.
Convenience mode
- Unlock and open the driver's door or switch on radio readiness, refer to page 58.
- Lightly push the desired memory button 1 or 2.
The adjusting procedure is halted when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.
Safety feature
- Close the driver's door and switch the ignition on or off, refer to page 58.
- Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and keep it pressed until the adjustment process has been completed.
If the button was pressed accidentally: Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Call-up with the remote control
The driver's seat position last stored is stored for the remote control currently in use.
You can select the occasion on which the seat is reset to that position.
▶ Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked.
▶ Call-up when the driver's door is opened.
When this Personal Profile function is used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.
The adjusting procedure is halted when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MUNDB
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Central locking" and press the controller.
-
Select "Last seat pos." and press the controller.
-
Select "After unlocking" or "After door opened".
- Press the controller.
Switching off automatic call-up
Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.
Safety belts
Observe the adjustment instructions on page 45 to ensure the best possible per-protection.
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.
Closing
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is adjusted properly, refer to page 45.
Opening
- Grasp the belt firmly.
-
Press the red button in the buckle.
-
Guide the belt into its reel.
'Fasten safety belts' reminder for front seats
The indicator lamps come on and an acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display. Check whether the safety belt
has been fastened correctly.
The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as long as the driver's safety belt has not been fastened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also issued above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h if the front passenger's safety belt has not been fastened, if there are objects on the front passenger's seat or if the driver or front passenger unfasten their safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-
tem, including any belt tensioners or child-restraint systems, replaced and the belt anchors checked. Have this work done only by your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is not guaranteed that the safety devices will function properly.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more convex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind you on the basis of what you see in the mirror; otherwise there is an increased risk of an accident.
1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic curb monitor*
3 Folding mirrors in and out *
The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for the remote control currently in use*. The stored position is called up automatically when the vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in narrow streets, for example, or for moving mirrors that were folded in by hand back out into their correct positions. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Depending on the outside temperature, both exterior mirrors are heated automatically when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
Passenger-side mirror tilt function – automatic curb monitor*
Activating
- Push the switch to the position for the driver's-side mirror, arrow 1.
- Engage reverse gear or move the selector lever to position R.
The glass of the mirror on the passenger side tilts slightly down. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into a parking space.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the passenger-side mirror, arrow 2.
Interior rearview mirror
Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head-lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature*
The automatic dimming feature of the interior and exterior mirrors* is controlled by two photo cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield directly in front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the car is in motion, otherwise there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected movement.
- Fold the lever down.
- Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seated position.
- Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever back up, otherwise the mechanism will be damaged.
Programmable buttons on the steering wheel
You can program the buttons individually.
These settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press the controller.
A list showing various functions is displayed:
"Navigation voice instructions"
Voice messages from the navigation system
"Air recirculation on / off"
To shut off the supply of outside air permanently, refer to Automatic recircu-
lated-air control AUC/Recirculated-air mode on page 99
"Mute on / off"
To mute the audio sources
"Telephone list"
To switch between any menu and telephone
"Next entertainment source"
To change the audio source
"Display open / close"
To open and close the screen
- Select the desired function and press the controller.
- Select a button, if appropriate, and press the controller.
You can operate the selected function using the corresponding button.
Operating a function
Briefly press the appropriate button on the steering wheel.
If you have programmed "Navigation voice instructions" for one of the buttons:
Switch voice instructions on/off: Press the button for a longer period.
To repeat the last voice instruction: Press the button briefly.
To cancel a voice instruction during an announcement:
Press the button briefly.
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, otherwise they could endanger themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.
Children always in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.
Children under the age of 13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only in the rear in suitable child-restraint systems appropriate for their age, weight and size. Otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must be buckled in with a safety belt as soon as there no longer is any child-restraint system that is appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child-restraint system on the front passenger the front and side airbags for the front passenger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child restring on that seat will face a significant risk of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even in a child-restraint system.
For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags refer to page 89.
Installing child-restraint systems
Observe the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when selecting, installing and using child-restraint systems.
Otherwise the protective effect may be diminished.
Standard child-restraint systems are designed to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly
or improperly installed child-restraint systems can increase the risk of injury to children. Always follow the installation instructions for the system with the greatest care.
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that the front and side airbags for the front passenger are deactivated, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.
Backrest width*
The backrest width of the front passenger's seat must be at its widest possible setting. Do not change the setting after installing the child seat. Otherwise the child seat's stability on the front passenger's seat is limited.
-
Adjust the backrest width to its widest setting, refer to page 47.
-
Install the child seat.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger's safety belt can be prevented from being pulled out in order to fasten child-restraint systems.
To lock the safety belt
-
Secure the child-restraint system with the belt.
-
Pull the belt strap all the way out.
-
Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut against the child-restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
- Open the belt buckle.
- Remove the child-restraint system.
- Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the way.
LATCH child-restraint fixing system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.
To install and use the LATCH child
restraint system, follow the operating and safety instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system, otherwise the protective function of the seat may be compromised.
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out of the area for the child-restraint fixing system.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors are correctly engaged and that the child
restraint system is resting firmly against the backrest, otherwise the protective function of the seat may be compromised.
Coupe: rear seats
The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the labeled protective caps.
Convertible: rear seats
The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors are located at the positions indicated by arrows, in the gap between the seat and the backrest.
Coupe: child-restraint system with tether strap
Use the top tether anchors to secure child-restraint systems only, otherwise
the anchors could be damaged.
For child-restraint systems with tether straps there are two additional anchors, see arrows.
Coupe: placement of the tether strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise the strap will not properly secure the child-restraint system in the event of an accident.
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child-restraint system
If necessary, fold the head restraints upward before use.
- Push the head restraint upward.
- Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint holders.
- Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to the anchor.
- Push the head restraint into its lowermost position.
- Pull the retaining strap taut.
Driving
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.
Radio readiness is switched on. Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Convenient access*
If the car is equipped with convenient access, only insert the remote control into the ignition lock under special circumstances, refer to page 36.
Removing the remote control from the ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause damage.
Before removing the remote control, push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism.
The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission
You cannot take out the remote control unless the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.
Start/stop button
Pressing the start/stop button switches radio readiness or the ignition on or off.
The engine is started when you press the start/stop button and depress the clutch if the car has manual transmission, or the brake if the car has automatic transmission.
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock
In cars with convenient access*, by touching the surface above the door lock, refer to Locking on page 36
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electri-
cal consumers in order to preserve the battery.
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as displays in the instrument cluster go out.
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms, otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust gases can cause unconsciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running, otherwise such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the car with the engine running, place the transmission in neutral or move the selector lever to position P and forcefully apply the parking brake to prevent the car from moving.
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Avoid frequent starting in quick succession as well as repeated start attempts in which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with convenient access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 36.
- Depress the brake.
- Depress the clutch and shift to neutral position.
- Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.
Automatic transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with convenient access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 36.
- Depress the brake.
- Move the selector lever to position P.
- Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.
Switching off the engine
Always take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake forcefully, otherwise the vehicle could begin to roll.
Manual transmission
- With the car at a standstill, press the start/stop button.
- Shift into first gear or reverse.
- Forcefully apply the parking brake.
- Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 58.
Automatic transmission
- With the car at a standstill, move the selector lever to position P.
- Press the start/stop button.
- Forcefully apply the parking brake.
- Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 58.
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp is lit, and when you drive off a signal sounds in addition. The parking brake is still applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake has to be used to slow or stop the car, do not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, continuously press the button of the parking brake lever.
Otherwise, excessive force on the parking brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the car to swerve.
To prevent corrosion and one-sided braking action, occasionally apply the parking brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the parking brake is applied.
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise the engine could be damaged if you inadvertently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission with Steptronic*
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to page 61.
Vehicle parking
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always select position P and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine running.
Disengaging the remote control
In order to remove the remote control from the ignition lock, you must first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 58.
Selector lever positions
PRNDM/S+-
Displays in the instrument cluster
P R N D DS M1 to M6
The selector lever position is displayed, or the current gear in the manual mode.
Changing selector lever positions
With the ignition switched on or the engine running, the selector lever can be moved out of position P: interlock.
Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise the selector lever will refuse to move: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, less the brake until you are ready to
A lock prevents you from inadvertently engaging selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the lock, press the button on the front of the selector lever, see arrow.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are locked.
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All forward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel consumption is lowest when you are driving in position D.
Kick-down
Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum performance.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full-throttle resistance point.
Sport program and manual operation M/S
Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot:
The sport program is activated and DS is displayed on the instrument cluster. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving style.
To use the automatic mode again, move the selector lever to the right into position D.
Shifting gears via the selector lever
When you press the selector lever forwards or backwards, the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear. M1 through M6 are displayed on the instrument cluster.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system. The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.
Shifting gears via shift paddles* on the steering wheel
The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly since both hands can remain on the steering wheel.
When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode.
If you do not accelerate or shift gears using the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, manual mode remains active.
To shift up: pull one of the shift paddles.
To shift down: press one of the shift paddles.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system. The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.
Overriding selector lever lock
Should the selector lever refuse to move out of position P although the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden:
- Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
- Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out.
- Using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 223, press the red lever, see arrow, while moving the selector lever to the desired position.
Turn signals/headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To turn off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp and the turn signals indicates that one of the turn signal bulbs has failed.
Indicating a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point. The turn signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Triple turn signal" and press the controller.
Triple turn signaling is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps *
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sensitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to operation in the intermittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance point.
The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the button lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn the thumb wheel 5.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor before entering an automatic car wash. Failure to do so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.
Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and the wipers are operated for a short time.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield. If you do, your vision could be obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.
Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated automatically* while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Therefore, keep it away from ignition sources and only store it in the closed original container that is kept out of reach of children, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.
Comply with the instructions on the container.
Washer fluid filler neck
Only refill washer fluid when the engine is cool to avoid contact with hot engine
parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to personal safety.
All washer nozzles are supplied with washer fluid by the same reservoir.
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recommendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.
Capacity
Approx. 6.3USquarts/6liters.
Cruise control*
The concept
You can use the cruise control feature beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the lever on the steering column.
Do not use cruise control when driving at constant speed is prevented by adverse conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice or loose surfaces. Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.
One lever for all functions
![graph TD A["1"] --> B["2"] C["3"] --> D["4"] E["5"] --> F["6"] G["7"] --> H["8"] I["9"] --> J["10"] K["Off"] --> L["11"]](/content/2026/05/1019009/images/6773c21e2c423ac8ce22ff9ca8c57a7976a8bd0b140b1b1221e853286a99901b.jpg)
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerating
2 Storing and maintaining speed or decelerating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Maintaining current speed
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2. The car's current speed is stored and maintained. It is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster.
If the engine braking power is insufficient on a downhill slope, the set speed may be exceeded. On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if engine power output is insufficient.
Increasing speed
Repeatedly press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
Each time the lever is pressed lightly, the speed is increased by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
Accelerating using the lever
Press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores and maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is reached.
The functions are the same as when the set speed is increased or the vehicle is accelerated, except that in this case the speed decreases.
Deactivating cruise control
Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3. In addition, the system is automatically deactivated:
When you brake the vehicle
When you depress the clutch of a manual transmission or shift to neutral
When you select the automatic transmission's neutral position N
When the vehicle travels faster or slower than the set speed for an extended period, e.g. when the accelerator is depressed
When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC
When DSC is intervening
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press the button, arrow 4.
The last stored speed is resumed and maintained.
The stored speed is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is switched off.
Display in the instrument cluster
When the speed at which the vehicle is traveling is stored or when a stored speed is called up, the speed is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster.
Everything under control
Odometer, outside temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature and clock
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument cluster
To reset the trip odometer while the ignition is switched on
To display the time, outside temperature and odometer briefly while the ignition is switched off
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer as well as ° F or ° C for the outside temperature, refer to Units of measure on page 71.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Time, outside temperature display
Setting the time, refer to page 75.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to approx. +37 °F/+3 °C, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is an increased risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures above +37 °F/+3 °C. You should there-
fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded
roads, for example, otherwise there is an increased risk of an accident.
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, outside temperature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the ignition lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Tachometer
Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addition, a message will appear on the Control Display.
Check coolant level, refer to page 216.
Engine oil temperature*
When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the engine oil temperature is between approx. 210 °F/100°C and approx. 300 °F/150°C.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a message appears on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 14 US gallons/53 liters.
You can find information on refueling on page 202.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Fuel display 135i: in speedometer.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone, a message briefly appears on the Control Display and the cruising range for the remaining amount of fuel is displayed on the computer. Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message remains in the Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.
Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster
Calling up information
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
The following items of information are displayed in the order listed:
Cruising range
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption
No information
To set the corresponding units of measure, refer to Adjusting the units of measure on page 71.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated on the basis of the way the car has been driven over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of fuel currently in the tank.
It is important that you refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls
below 30 miles/50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed.
With the trip computer, refer to page 70, you can have the average speed for another trip displayed.
To reset average speed: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.
With the trip computer, refer to page 70, you can have the average consumption for another trip displayed.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. This allows you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with minimum exhaust emissions.
Displays on the Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive; for the operating principle, refer to page 16.
- Press the buettol
This opens the start menu. - Move the controller to the right to call up "Navigation".
- Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
电话:010-88865
- Select "Onboard info" and press the controller.
E30296100W
▶ Estimated time of arrival at destination:
Manually enter a distance in the computer, refer to information further below
Enter a destination in the navigation system, refer to page 123
Cruising range
Distance to destination:
Manually enter a distance in the computer, refer to information further below
Enter a destination in the navigation system, refer to page 123
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
Resetting values
You can reset the values for average speed and average consumption:
- Select the respective menu item and press the controller.
- Press the controller again to confirm your selection.
Entering a distance manually
- Select "Distance to dest." and press the controller.
- Turn the controller to select the distance to your destination.
- Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance is automatically entered during destination guidance.
Trip computer
- Open the start menu.
- Call up "Navigation".
- Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
- Select "Trip computer" and press the controller.
Departure time
Driving time
Distance traveled
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
Switching trip computer on/off and resetting all values to zero:
- Select "Set" and press the controller.
- Select the desired menu item and press the controller.
Settings and information
Operating principle
1 Button for:
Selecting display
Setting values
2 Button for:
▶ Confirming selected display or set values
▶ Calling up computer information 68
3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting brightness 95
4 Calling up Check Control 77
Units of measure
You can set units of measure.
Adjusting the units of measure
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
5 Checking oil level 213
6 Setting the time 75
7 Setting the date 76
8 Viewing service requirement display 72
Exiting displays
The outside-temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required, complete the current setting first.
- Select "Language / Units" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
- Select "Language / Units" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Units" is selected and press the controller.
- Select the desired menu item and press the controller.
- Select the desired measurement unit and press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can be read out from the remote control by your BMW Service Advisor.
For certain maintenance operations, you can view the respective distance remaining or due date individually in the instrument cluster.
- Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58.
- Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".
- Press button 2.
- Use button 1 to scroll through the individual service items.
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting functions
2 Service requirements
3 Engine oil
4 Roadworthiness test *
5 Front brake pads
Supplementary information
You can call up additional information on the maintenance regimen on the Control Display. iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Info sources" and press the controller.
- Select "Service Info" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
6 Rear brake pads
7 Brake fluid
The sequence of displayed service items may vary. The data for the next service appointment is shown first.
until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Status" and press the controller.
A list of selected maintenance operations and, if applicable, inspections required by law is displayed.
You can request more detailed information on every entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select and press the controller.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching. Please
schedule a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is always set correctly, refer to page 76, otherwise the effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not ensured.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENB
This opens the start menu. - Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Info sources" and press the controller.
- Select "Service Info" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Status" and press the controller.
- Select "State inspection" and press the controller.
-
Select "Set service date" and press the controller. The month is highlighted.
-
Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
-
Press the controller to apply the setting. The year is highlighted.
-
Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
-
Press the controller to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Select and press the controller.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 217.
Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 28.
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the 12h/24h format.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
-
Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
-
Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is selected and press the controller.
-
Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the time and the word "SET".
- Press button 2.
- Use button 1 to set the hours.
- Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
- Use button 1 to set the minutes.
- Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
- Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
- If necessary, move the controller forward once to switch to the uppermost field.
- Turn the controller until "Time" is selected and press the controller.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
-
Press the button once or twice until the start menu appears.
-
Turn the controller until "Set time" is selected and press the controller.
Adjusting settings
- Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.
- Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.
The system accepts the new time.
Switching on the hour signal*
You will hear three tones just before each full hour.
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.
The hour signal is activated.
Setting the 12h/24h format
- Select "Time format" and press the controller.
- Select the desired format and press the controller.
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 28.
Setting the date
In the instrument cluster
To set the DD.MM or MM/DD date format, refer to Setting the date format.
- Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the date and the word "SET".
- Press button 2.
- Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
- Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
- Set the month and the year in the same way.
- Press button 2. The system stores the new date.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Time / Date" and press the controller.
- Select "Date" and press the controller.
- Select "Set date" and press the controller. The first setting of the date display is now highlighted, in this case the day.
-
Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
-
Press the controller to apply the setting. The next setting is highlighted.
- Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the date is stored.
Setting the date format
- Select "Date format" and press the controller.
- Select the desired format and press the controller.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the systems monitored. Such a Check Control message includes indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, in some circumstances, a signal as well as text messages at the bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.
⚠ indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. You can view the Check Control messages whenever it is convenient for you.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the lower edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.
For most Check Control messages, you can view more information later, e.g. regarding the cause of a malfunction and how to respond, refer to the information provided below.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
To exit the displayed information: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed until the respective malfunction has been rectified. They cannot be hidden. If several malfunctions occur at the same time, they are displayed in succession.
They are marked with the symbol shown here.
Other Check Control messages are automatically hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but are kept in memory.
They are marked with the symbol shown here.
Viewing stored Check Control messages
-
Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "CHECK".
-
Press button 2.
"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check Control messages. If a Check Control message has been stored, the corresponding lamp comes on. It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display.
-
Push button 1 to check for other messages.
-
Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.
Viewing more information later
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENOH!
This opens the start menu.
-
Press the controller to open the menu.
-
Select "Info sources" and press the controller.
-
Select "Service Info" and press the controller.
-
If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Check Control messages" is selected and press the controller.
- Select a text message and press the controller.
To exit the display:
Select and press the controller.
Speed limit*
You can enter a speed, and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu. - Call up "Navigation".
- Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
- Select "Limit" and press the controller.
Setting or changing the limit
- Select the speed and press the controller.
- Turn the controller to set the limit.
- Press the controller to apply the setting.
Applying your current speed as limit
Select "Select current speed" and press the controller. The system adopts your current speed as the limit.
Activating the limit
Select "On" and press the controller.
Limit is activated.
Stopwatch
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Call up "Navigation".
- Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
- Select "Stopwatch" and press the controller.
Starting, stopping or resetting the stop-watch
Taking an interim time reading
Starting, stopping or resetting
Select "Start" and press the controller. The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
Select "Reset" and press the controller. The stopwatch is reset and restarts if it was running beforehand.
Select "Stop" and press the controller. This stops the timer.
Taking an interim time reading
Select "Interim time" and press the controller. The interim time appears below the ongoing primary stopwatch count.
All of the remaining functions remain available at all times while the stopwatch is running. The stopwatch continues operation in the background.
Altering settings
Language on the Control Display
The language of the Control Display can be set. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu. - Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Language / Units" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Text language" and press the controller. You can switch to another language for the display texts and navigation messages.
- Select and activate the desired language by pressing the controller.
Brightness of the Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. Note, however, that you can change the basic setting while the low beams are switched on. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Open the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Display settings" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Brightness" is selected and press the controller.
- Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached.
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Park Distance Control PDC*
The concept
The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual indicator warn you of the presence of an object behind your vehicle. Four ultrasonic sensors in the bumper measure the distance.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not sound until an object is approx. 2 ft/60 cm from the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed, otherwise physical circumstances may lead to the system warning being issued too late.
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the system is activated after approx. 1 second when you engage reverse gear or move the automatic transmission selector lever to position R. Wait this short period before driving.
Switching off automatically
After approx. 55 yd/50 m of driving or above approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system switches off and the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, its position is indicated correspondingly by an interval tone. As the distance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone sounds.
An interval tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
If you remain in front of an object that has been detected by only one of the corner sensors
▶ If you are driving parallel to a wall
Malfunction
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. PDC is malfunctioning. A message appears on the Control Display. Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not direct the jet toward the sensors for lengthy periods and only spray from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.
PDC with visual warning
You can also have the system show distances to objects on the Control Display. The contours of distant objects are shown on the Control Display even before the acoustic signal sounds.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the buttal
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "PDC" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "PDC display on" and press the controller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display is shown on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are provided, there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected. The system is also subject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement, such as those encountered with trailer towbars and hitches, thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs, can disappear again from the detection area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected. Loud sound sources outside or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal. Therefore, always drive cautiously, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or property damage.
Driving stability control systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse driving conditions.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the engine. Braking safely, refer to page 116.
Electronic brake-force distribution EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Dynamic Brake Control DBC
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accelerate. The system also recognizes unstable driving conditions, for example if the rear of the car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting at an angle past the front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions at the individual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin again by taking risks, as this could result in an accident.
Deactivating DSC
Press the button for at least 3 seconds; the indicator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster light up. Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC have been simultaneously deactivated. Stabilizing and drive-output promoting actions are no longer executed.
In the same way as with a differential interlock, even if DSC is deactivated, brake actions are still performed on the rear axle to enhance drive output if the drive wheels experience a significant loss of traction.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button again; the indicator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster go out.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes: DSC is regulating the drive and braking forces.
If the indicator lamps are on: DSC is deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive output is optimized for particular road conditions, e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The system assures the maximal drive output, but with reduced driving stability. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:
When driving uphill on snow-covered roads, in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered roads
When rocking a stuck vehicle free or starting off in deep snow or on loose ground
When driving with snow chains
Activating DTC
Press the button; the indicator lamps for DTC in the instrument cluster come on.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes: DTC is regulating the drive and braking forces.
If the indicator lamps are on: DTC has been activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary to use the parking brake for this.
- Hold the car in place by depressing the brake.
- Release the brake and drive off without delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the car in place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off
assistant will no longer hold the car in place after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to roll backwards.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor detects pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotating speeds of the individual tires while moving.
In the event of pressure loss, the rolling circumference changes and, thus, the rotating speed of the affected wheel. This change is detected and is reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be initialized for the correct tire inflation pressure.
The system must be reinitialized each time a tire inflation pressure has been cord or a wheel or tire has been changed.
System limitations
The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn the driver of sudden, severe tire damage caused by external factors, nor can it identify the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of time.
In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:
▷ System has not been initialized
▶ Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
▶ Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
Snow chains are attached
Initializing the system
The initialization is completed during driving, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is continued automatically.
Do not initialize the system while snow chains are attached.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENBI
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "FTM" is selected and press the controller.
-
Start the engine, but do not start driving.
-
Select "Reset" and press the controller.
-
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
- Start to drive.
Initialization is completed while the car is on the move, without any feedback.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds. There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.
- Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If the car is not equipped with Run-Flat Tires, refer to page 210, the standard equipment by design, do not continue driving. A severe accident could result if you continue driving after a tire puncture.
- At the next opportunity, check the air pressure in all four tires.
If all four tires are inflated to the correct pressures, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.
- In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the distance for which you can continue driving on the basis of the following guidelines:
With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km
With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage:
approx. 90 miles/150 km
With a full load:
4 persons, cargo bay full: approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h, otherwise there is a risk of an accident. In the event of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics.
If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during the journey, this may be an indication that the damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your speed and pull over as soon as possible at a
suitable location. Otherwise parts of the tire could come loose, resulting in an accident. Do not continue driving. Instead, contact your BMW center.
Malfunction
The warning lamps come on in yellow. A message appears on the Control Display. The Flat Tire Monitor has a malfunction or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
The concept
TPM checks the inflation pressures of the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be reset while all tire inflation pressures are correct.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics. Otherwise, the system may malfunction.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been ged, reset the system.
System limitations
TPM cannot warn you in advance of sudden severe tire damage caused by out-influences.
The system does not work correctly if it has not been reset; for example, a flat tire may be indicated even though the tire inflation pressures are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire if a wheel without TPM electronics, such as a compact spare wheel, has been mounted, or if TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the same radio frequency.
Status indicator on the Control Display
The color of the wheels represents the status of the tires and the system.
TPM takes into account that tire pressures change while the vehicle is being driven. The tire pressures do not need to be corrected unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means of color indicators.
Green
The tire inflation pressure corresponds to the established target value.
"TPM active" appears on the Control Display.
One wheel yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in the indicated tire. A message appears on the Control Display.
All wheels yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in several tires. A message appears on the Control Display.
Gray
The system cannot detect a puncture.
Possible reasons for this:
TPM is being reset
Temporary malfunction caused by systems or devices using the same radio frequency
Malfunction
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reset the system.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu. -
Press the controller to open the menu.
-
Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "TPM" is selected and press the controller.
- Start the engine, but do not start driving.
- Select "Reset" and press the controller.
- Select "Yes" and press the controller.
- Start to drive.
The wheels are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored. The system reset is completed during your drive, and can be inter-
rupted at any time. When driving resumes, the reset is continued automatically. On the Control Display, the wheels are shown in green and "Status: TPM active" is displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is resetting and determining the inflation pressures, all wheels on the Control Display are displayed in yellow. The message "Tire low!" is shown.
Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds. There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.
- Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If the car is not equipped with Run-Flat Tires, refer to page 210, the standard equipment by design, do not continue driving. Otherwise a severe accident could result after a tire puncture if you continue driving.
- In the event of complete pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guidelines:
With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km
With a full load:
4 persons, cargo bay full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics.
If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during the journey, this may be an indication that the damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your speed and pull over as soon as possible at a suitable location. Otherwise parts of the tire could come loose, resulting in an accident. Do not continue driving. Instead, contact your BMW center.
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continuously; the larger warning lamp comes on in yellow. On the Control Display, the wheels are shown in gray and a message appears. No punctures can be detected.
This type of message is shown in the following situations:
If there is a malfunction Have the system checked.
If a wheel without TPM electronics has been mounted
If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the same radio frequency.
Message for unsuccessful system reset
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A message appears on the Control Display. The system is not reset after a tire has been changed, for example.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system, refer to page 86.
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Active steering*
The concept
Active steering varies the turning angle of the front wheels in relation to steering wheel movements. It also varies the steering force required to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving.
When you are driving in the low road-speed range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes very direct, and less effort is required to turn the wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is reduced more and more. This improves the handling capability of your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make targeted corrections to the steering angle provided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing intervention is simultaneously deactivated when DSC is switched off, refer to page 82.
Malfunction
The warning lamps come on. Active steering is no longer operational. At low speeds, greater steering wheel movements are required, whereas at
higher speeds the vehicle reacts more sensi- tively to steering wheel movements. The stabil- ity-enhancing feature may also be deactivated. Drive cautiously and think well ahead. Have the system checked.
Brake Force Display*
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: sharp braking.
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: head airbags
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests
4 Convertible: knee airbags
Protective action
Observe the adjustment instructions on page 45 to ensure the best possible per-protection.
The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side airbag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be triggered in every collision situation, e.g. not in minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or modify them in any other way. Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other objects not specifically approved for seats with integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do not modify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the upholstered covers on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or triggering of the airbag restraint system, have the testing, repair, removal and disposal of airbag generators executed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to repair procedures of BMW with correspondingly trained personnel and that has the required explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to work on the system could lead to failure in an emergency or to undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury. Warning notices and information about the airbags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front passenger seat cushion determines whether and how the seat is occupied. The front and side air bags for the front passenger are activated or deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Status of front passenger airbags below.
Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, read the safety precau- and handling instructions under Trans- ing children safely, refer to page 55.
The front and side airbags can also be deacti-
vated by adolescents and adults sitting in certain positions; the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the passenger should change his or her sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by changing the sitting position, transport the relevant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not place any items under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Otherwise a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not ensured.
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags shows the functional status of the front passenger's front and side airbags in accordance with whether and how the front passenger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.
The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a specially designated child-restraint system is detected, as intended, on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the system, especially child seats
required by the NHTSA at the time of vehicle production. After mounting a child seat, ensure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the child seat has been detected and that the front passenger airbags are deactivated.
The indicator lamp does not come on as long as a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front passenger are activated.
The indicator lamp does not come on if the seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, refer to page 58, the warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
Warning lamp does not light up at radio readiness or beyond.
Warning lamp remains permanently on.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay, otherwise there is the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs.
Convertible: rollover protection system
The rollover protection system is activated automatically in the event of an accident, a critical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact. The protection bars behind the rear head restraints deploy within fractions of a second.
As a supplementary system to the reinforced windshield frame, the rollover protection system ensures that the necessary headroom is maintained for all vehicle occupants.
Always keep the area of movement of the rollover protection system clear.
In minor accidents, you are protected by the fastened safety belt and, depending on accident severity, by the safety belt tensioner and multi-phase airbag retention system.
Resetting
If the rollover protection system was not impacted after being automatically activated, it can be reset by lowering the protection bars to their original positions. This does not require tools.
- Push the locking lever to one side and hold it there.
- Push the protection bar halfway down from above.
- Release the locking lever.
- Push the protection bar down until it snaps into place.
- Repeat the procedure for the other protection bar.
Have the rollover protection system checked after an unexpected activation.
Never move the convertible top when the rollover protection system is in the acti- l position.
Do not make any modifications to the individual components of the rollover protection system or its cabling.
Work on the rollover protection system should only be performed by a BMW center.
Incorrectly performed work on the system may lead to system failure or incorrect operation.
To check the system and ensure flawless long-term operation, always observe the service intervals, refer to page 72.
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lamps off, daytime running lamps
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
2 Low beams, welcome lamps*
3 Automatic headlamp control *, daytime running lamps*, welcome lamps*, Adaptive Head Light*
When you open the driver's door with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off if the light switch is in position 0, 2 or 3.
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch position 1.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps will discharge the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time, otherwise the battery might not have enough power to start the engine. It is preferable to switch on the left-hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps, refer to page 94.
Low-beam headlamps
The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control*
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The Adaptive Head Light* is active. The LED next to the symbol is illuminated when the low beams are on. You can also activate the daytime running lamps, refer to page 93. In the situations described above, the lamps then automatically switch from daytime running lamps to low beams.
The headlamps may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The low beams remain switched on independent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the fog lamps*.
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the system cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the low-beam headlamps manually under these conditions.
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 when you park the car, the parking lamps and the interior lamps light up briefly when you unlock the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating welcome lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
-
Press the controller to open the menu.
-
Select "Settings" and press the controller.
-
Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
-
If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Welcome light" and press the controller.
The welcome lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after parking the car, with the lamps switched off, the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time.
You can adjust the operating period or deactivate the function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
-
Press the controller to open the menu.
-
Select "Settings" and press the controller.
-
Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
-
If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Pathway lighting" and press the controller.
- Turn the controller to select the corresponding duration.
- Press the controller to apply the setting.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Daytime running lamps*
The daytime running lamps light up in switch position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than the low beams.
Activating/deactivating daytime running lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Daytime running lamps" and press the controller.
The daytime running lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h, e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside area of the curve.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
With the ignition switched on, turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 92.
The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on automatically, depending on the steering wheel angle or turn signal indicator.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Head Light directs light towards the front passenger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When you are reversing, only the corner-illuminating lamps are active and switched on on both sides.
Malfunction
The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-lamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
High beams/roadside parking lamps*
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps *
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
There is an additional option of switching on the lamps on the side of the car facing the road when parked.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the pressure point for approx. 1 second, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time, otherwise the battery might not have enough power to start the engine.
Switching off
Press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure point, arrow 3.
Fog lamps*
To switch on/off, press the button.
The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.
The fog lamps are switched off while you activate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams.
If the automatic headlamp control is activated, the low beams will come on auto-ally when you switch on the fog lamps.
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the parking lamps or the low beams are switched on.
-
Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the brightness level and the word "SET".
-
Press button 2.
-
Push button 1 up or down to select the desired brightness level.
-
Press button 2. The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, footwell lamps *, entry lamps*, cargo bay lamp and courtesy lamps* are controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside the car are switched off about
8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer to Start/stop button on page 58.
Switching interior lamps on/off manually
Interior lamps, front and rear*:
To switch on and off, press the button.
To switch off the interior lamps, footwell lamps*, entry lamps* and courtesy lamps* permanently, press the button for the front interior lamps for about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
There are reading lamps at the front and rear*, next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off, press the button.
Climate
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air to the upper body area: Draft-free ventilation 100
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air distribution, manual
5 Temperature adjustment, left-hand side of passenger compartment
6 Maximum cooling
7 AUTO program
8 Air flow rate, manual
9 Display for temperature and air supply
10 Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/Recirculated-air mode
11 Temperature adjustment, right-hand side of passenger compartment
12 Residual heat
13 Windows, defrosting and removing condensation
14 Switching cooling function on/off manually
15 Rear window defroster
16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor – please keep clear and unobstructed
The current setting for the air distribution is displayed on the Control Display.
Automatic climate control
Comfortable interior climate
The AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution and air flow rate for almost all conditions. All you need to do is select an interior temperature which is comfortable for you.
The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile settings on page 28.
Adjusting air distribution manually
The air distribution can be switched on and off manually. The air is directed to the windshield, to the upper body area and to the
footwell. Automatic air distribution adjustment is deactivated.
You can switch the automatic air distribution back on by pressing the AUTO button. This automatically switches on the cooling function as well.
Fine adjustments to manual air distribution
You can set the rate of incoming airflow for manual air distribution.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu. - Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".
- Select "Vent settings" and press the controller.
- Select the desired field.
- Turn the controller to set the air distribution.
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
3 Air to the footwell
Temperature
Set the desired temperatures individually for the driver's and front passenger's sides.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as quickly as possible regardless of the season, using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary, and then maintains it.
When you switch between different temperature settings in quick succession, the automatic climate control does not have enough time to achieve the set temperature.
You can achieve maximum heating power with the highest setting, regardless of the outside temperature.
The lowest setting effects continuous cooling.
Maximum cooling
At outside temperatures above 32 °F /0 °C and when the engine is running, you obtain a maximum cooling effect as soon as possible.
The automatic climate control goes into recirculated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air flows at maximum rate from the vents for the upper body area. You should therefore open them for maximum cooling.
AUTO program
The AUTO program adjusts the air distribution to the windshield and side windows, towards the upper
body area and into the footwell for you. The air flow rate and your temperature specifications will be adapted to outside influences as a result of seasonal changes, e.g. sunlight or window condensation.
The cooling is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
Press the AUTO button repeatedly to set the intensity of the AUTO program. The current setting is briefly displayed on the Control Display every time the button is pressed.
You can also set the intensity of the AUTO program via iDrive.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Call up "Climate".
- Select "Automatic programs" and press the controller.
- Select the desired field.
- Press the controller to set the desired intensity.
The selected intensity level of the automatic program is switched on.
Convertible program
When the convertible top is down, the Convertible program becomes available for selection. In the Convertible program, the automatic climate control is optimized for driving with the convertible top down. In addition, the air flow rate is increased as vehicle speed increases.
When the Convertible program has been selected, it is automatically activated every time the convertible top is opened.
The effectiveness of the Convertible program can be enhanced considerably by
installing the wind deflector.
Adjusting air flow rate manually
Press the left side of the button to reduce airflow. Press the right side of the button to increase it. You can
reactivate the automatic mode for the air flow rate with the AUTO button.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower may be switched off entirely to save on battery power. The display remains the same.
Switching the system on/off
With the blower at its lowest setting, press the left side of the button to switch off the automatic climate control. All displays are cleared except for the rear window defroster if it is switched on.
Press any button except REST or rear window defroster to reactivate the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/Recirculated-air mode
Switch on the desired operating mode by pressing this button repeatedly:
▶ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air. If necessary, the system blocks the supply of outside air and recirculates the inside air. As soon as the concentration of pollutants in the outside air has decreased sufficiently, the system automatically switches back to outside air supply.
Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently
shut off. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the inside window surfaces during operation in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch it off while also increasing the air flow rate as required.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods, otherwise the quality of the air inside the car will gradually deteriorate.
Via the button* on the steering wheel
You can use an individually programmable button on the steering wheel, refer to page 53, to select between the different modes.
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the passenger compartment, e.g. while stopped at a school to pick up a child.
The function can be switched on when the following conditions are met:
Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been switched off
While the engine is at operating temperature
As long as battery voltage is sufficient
At an outside temperature below 77 °F / 25 °C
The LED is lit when the function is on.
As of radio readiness, you can set the interior temperature, air flow rate and air distribution.
Windows, defrosting and removing condensation
Quickly removes ice and condensation from the windshield and front side windows.
Switch on the cooling function as well.
Switching cooling function on/off
The cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air before reheating it as required, according to the temperature setting. This function is only available while the engine is running.
The cooling function helps prevent condensation on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is automatically switched on along with the AUTO program.
Rear window defroster
The defroster is switched off automatically after a certain time. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the upper wires serve
as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.
Ventilation
1 Use the knurled wheels to smoothly open and close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the airflow
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, for instance if it has become too hot in the car.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and not straight at you.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter provides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW center replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance.
Parked car ventilation*
The concept
The parked car ventilation provides ventilation to the passenger compartment and lowers its temperature, if necessary.
The parked car ventilation system is operated via iDrive, refer to page 16. Two different switch-on times can be preselected.
The parked car ventilation remains switched on for 30 minutes. The system can also be switched on and off directly. Due to its high power consumption, it should not be switched on twice in a row without driving in between to allow the battery to recharge.
The parked car ventilation system comes on if the outside temperature is above 59 °F/15 °C when the switch-on time was preselected, but is ready for use at any temperature when the system is switched on directly.
The air emerges from the air vents for the upper body area in the instrument panel. The air vents must therefore be open.
Switching on/off directly
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu. - Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".
- Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.
-
Select "Automatic ventilation" and press the controller.
-
Select "Parked car ventilation" and press the controller.
If the symbol on the display of the automatic climate control is flashing, parked car ventilation is switched on.
Preselecting switch-on times
- Call up "Climate".
- Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.
- Select "Activation time" and press the controller.
Two consecutive switch-on times must be at least 31 minutes apart.
- Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
- Select the time and press the controller. The hours setting is selected.
- Turn the controller to set the hours.
- Press the controller to select the minutes setting.
- Turn the controller to set the minutes.
Activating switch-on times
Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and press the controller.
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes when the system has switched on.
The parked car ventilation system is switched on within the next 24 hours only.
After that, the time setting must be reactivated.
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand-held transmitters for various remote-controlled devices, such as garage doors and gates or lighting systems. The integrated universal remote control registers and stores signals from the original hand-held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three memory buttons 1. After this, the programmed memory button 1 will operate the system in question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to delete the stored programs beforehand for your safety, refer to page 104.
To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated. Comply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter.
Checking compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package or in the instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, you can
assume that the radio remote control device will be compatible with the integrated universal remote control.
For additional information, please contact your BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515.
You can also obtain information on the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
- Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58.
- When starting operation for the first time: press the left and right memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons are cleared.
- Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem- buttons 1 depends on the system of the effective original hand-held transmitter
- Simultaneously press the transmit key on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step.
- To program other original hand-held transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device while the ignition is switched off.
If the device fails to function even after repeated programming, check whether the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. To do so, either read the instructions for the original hand-held transmitter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly and then remains lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If it uses an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.
Alternating-code hand-held transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the device to be set. You will find information there on the possibilities for synchronization. When programming hand-held transmitters that employ an alternating code, please observe the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.
- Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.
- Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
- Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
- Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set. After step 4, you have approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
- Press the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.
If you have any questions, please contact your BMW center.
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rapidly: all stored programs are deleted.
Reassigning individual programs
- Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-uttons 1 depends on the system of the active original hand-held transmitter - Press the desired memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control.
- If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit key of the original hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step.
Digital compass*
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen or similar item. The following adjustment options are displayed one after the other, depending on how long you keep the adjustment button pressed:
▶ Press briefly: switch display on/off
3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone
6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass
9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand steering
12 to 15 seconds: set the language
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your vehicle's geographic location so that the compass can function correctly; refer to the world map with compass zones.
To set the compass zone, press the adjustment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corresponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations:
An incorrect compass direction is shown.
The compass direction shown does not change although the direction of travel does.
Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
- Make sure that no large metal objects or overhead power lines are in the vicinity of your vehicle and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.
- Set the currently valid compass zone.
- Press the adjustment button for approx. 6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at least one full circle at a speed of no more than 4 mph or 7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the display changes from C to a compass direction.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to right-hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with your vehicle.
Setting the language
You can set the language of the display:
Press the adjustment button for approx. 12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English, "E", and German, "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.
Glove compartment
Opening
wiclibin@ias
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an accident while the vehicle is being driven, close the glove compartment immediately after use.
Closing
Fold cover up.
Locking
To lock the glove compartment, use the integrated key of the remote control, refer to page 28.
LED hand lamp
Coupe
The LED hand lamp is stored in the glove compartment.
Convertible
The LED hand lamp is located in a holder inside the glove compartment on the left side.
Insert the hand lamp into the holder with the lens pointing toward the passenger compartment to ensure that the lamp cannot be switched on accidentally.
Center armrest
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats contains a credit card holder and, depending on the equipment version, a compartment or a snap-in adapter*.
Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system:
▶ AUX-In port, refer to page 169
▶ USB-audio interface, refer to page 170
Storage compartments inside the vehicle
Compartments are located next to the steering column*, on the doors and in the center console.
There are nets* on the front-seat backrests.
Coupe: clothes hooks
There are clothes hooks in the rear.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks, otherwise they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.
Cup holders
Use lightweight and shatterproof containers and do not transport hot beverages, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of the accident. Do not force containers that are too large into the cup holders, otherwise damage could result.
There is one cup holder in the center console.
You can mount an attachable cup holder* on the side of the center console.
Ashtray*
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the remote control so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.
Connecting electrical appliances
In your BMW, when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on, you can use electrical devices such as a hand lamp, car vacuum cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at 12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets is available. Avoid damaging the socket by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Cigarette lighter socket*
To access the socket:
Open the ashtray at the front and pull out the lighter to use the socket.
In the cargo bay*
To access the socket:
Fold open the cover.
In the center console
To access the socket, refer to AUX-In port on page 169.
Coupe: through-loading system
Opening
-
To release the rear seat backrest, pull the corresponding lever in the cargo bay.
-
The unlocked rear seat backrest moves forward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by the head restraint.
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to its upright position and engage it.
When returning the backrest into its seating position, make sure that the seat's
locking mechanism is properly engaged. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown around in the event of sharp braking or swerving and endanger the occupants.
The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you with a way to attach cargo bay nets* or draw straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer to page 117.
Convertible: cargo loading
Enlarging the cargo bay
When the convertible top is closed you can enlarge the cargo bay:
To do so, fold the cargo bay partition upward.
Before opening the convertible top, pull the cargo bay partition down until it engages.
Ensure that pointed objects do not press against the cargo bay partition from below.
The convertible top can only be opened when the cargo bay partition is folded
down.
Storage compartments inside the cargo bay
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the following storage spaces can be found in the cargo bay:
Rubber strap on the left trim panel for securing small objects such as a folding umbrella
Net for small objects on the right trim panel of the cargo bay
Retaining straps* on cargo bay floor: for securing smaller objects or as an anti-slip surface when you place objects on the straps
The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you with a way to attach cargo bay nets* or draw straps* for securing suitcases and luggage, refer to page 118.
Coupe: ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6.6ft/2.0m. When skis of 6.6ft/2.0 length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
Loading
Ensure that the skis are clean when they are loaded into the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.
- Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest.
- Press the button, reach into the recess and fold down the cover. To stabilize the cover in the folded-down position, place the center panel underneath it.
- Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski bag between the front seats and insert the skis or snowboards.
The zip fastener makes objects in the ski bag easier to reach.
- Attach the hook of the ski bag retaining strap to the eyelet on the side of the ski bag opening.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in the manner described, otherwise it could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.
To store the ski bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.
- Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest.
- Pull the handle, arrow 1.
- Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various inserts available, contact your BMW cen-
ter.
Convertible: through-loading opening with integrated transport bag*
The transport bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.
With the transport bag you can stow skis up to a length of 6.6 ft/2.0 m. When skis of 6.6 ft/2.0 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
When using the transport bag, it is not permissible to transport passengers in
the rear seats.
Loading
- Pull the grip in the filler piece of the rear backrest up and take out the filler piece.
- Place the filler piece onto the seat cushion with the backrest side facing up.
- In the cargo bay: press the two recesses together and fold down the cover.
- Release the strap, lay out the transport bag between the front seats and load it. The zip fastener makes objects in the ski bag easier to reach.
Ensure that the skis are clean when you load them into the transport bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the transport bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the transport bag in the manner described, otherwise it could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.
To store the transport bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.
Driving tips
This section provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions.
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. Please follow the instructions below in order to achieve the optimal service life and economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do not exceed an engine speed of 4500 rpm or a road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kick-down mode.
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.
Saving fuel
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on several factors. You can lower fuel consumption and the environmental impact by taking certain measures, adjusting your driving style and having the vehicle serviced regularly.
Remove any unneeded cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove any mounted parts after you have finished using them
Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof rack and the rear luggage rack after use. Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynamics and increase fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass roof
An open glass roof or window causes higher air resistance and thus increases fuel consumption.
Check tire inflation pressure regularly
Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before embarking on a long journey, and correct it if necessary.
Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling resistance and thus increases fuel consumption and tire wear.
Set off immediately
Do not let the engine warm up while the car is still standing, but set off immediately at moderate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Drive defensively
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate distance to the forward vehicle. A defensive and smooth driving style keeps fuel consumption down.
Avoid high engine speeds
Only use first gear when setting off. In second and higher gears, accelerate without hesitation or pauses. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high engine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a constant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and coast to a stop in the highest applicable gear.
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accelerator and coast in a suitable gear.
The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.
Switch off the engine during lengthy stops
Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestions. You achieve fuel savings even if standing time is as short as approx. 4 seconds.
Switch off functions you do not need at the moment
Functions such as the air conditioner and the seat or rear window heating draw large amounts of power and consume additional fuel. Especially in city traffic and in stop-and-go driving they have a considerable impact. Therefore, switch these functions off when they are not really needed.
Have the vehicle serviced
Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW recommends having the vehicle serviced at a BMW center. Also note the BMW service system, refer to page 217.
General driving notes
Close the luggage compartment lid
Operate the vehicle only when the luggage compartment lid is closed. Other-exhaust fumes could enter the interior of vehicle.
If the vehicle must be driven with the luggage compartment lid open:
-
Close all windows and the glass roof.
-
Greatly increase the air volume of the automatic climate control system, refer to page 99.
Hot exhaust system
In all vehicles, extremely high temperatures are generated in the exhaust systems. Do not remove the heat shields installed in vicinity, and never apply undercoating to . When driving, standing at idle and while, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly amable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, such contact could lead to a fire, with the lack of serious personal injuries and property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge tter can form between tires and road sur- This situation, known as hydroplaning, is that the tire can completely lose contact the road surface, so that neither the car can be ered nor the brake be properly applied.
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining tread depth on the tires, refer also to Minimum tread depth on page 209.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the le's engine, the electrical systems and the mission may be damaged.
Use the parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a lengthy period using the clutch; use the ring brake instead. Otherwise greater clutch will result.
For more information about the drive-off assistant, refer to page 83.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that ABS is in its active mode.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system, long or steep downhill gradients in the n which the least braking is required. Even out consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, all the way to first gear if necessary. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system. Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic transmission, refer to page 61.
Never drive with the clutch held down, with the transmission in neutral or with engine switched off; otherwise, engine action will not be present or there will be lower assistance to the brakes or steering. For allow floor mats, carpets or any other sets to protrude into the area around the pls, otherwise pedal function could be fired.
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic climate control is in operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Before driving into a car wash
General information on caring for your BMW can be found on page 219.
With convenient access and automatic transmission
Insert the remote control into the ignition switch.
The engine can be switched off when the selector lever is in position N. Refer also to page 37.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This can ultimately result in a sudden blow-out.
Make sure that no liquids are spilled or leak from their containers in the cargo bay, as this could result in damage to the vehicle.
Determining loading limit
- Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard*:
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading can result in damage to the vehicle and unstable driving conditions.
-
Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
-
Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.
-
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
- Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
- If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
Coupe
Convertible
Position heavy objects as low and as far forward as possible, ideally directly behind the respective seat backrests.
▶ Cover sharp edges and corners.
For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle.
Securing cargo
Secure smaller and lighter items using retaining straps, a cargo bay net* or draw straps*.
Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your BMW center. To attach the cargo straps, there are two lashing eyes, arrows 1, on the inside wall of the cargo bay. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, there may be two additional lashing eyes, arrows 2, on the cargo bay sidewalls.
Follow the information included with the cargo straps.
Always position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endanger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or swerving is necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 239, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in violation of traffic safety laws.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car, since they could be thrown around, for example as a result of heavy braking, sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occupants.
Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to page 56, otherwise these could be damaged.
Coupe: roof-mounted luggage rack*
A special rack system is available as an option for your BMW. Comply with the directions given in the installation instructions.
Mounting points
Fold open the cover.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 239.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and should not be too large in area. Heavy items should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure
that adequate clearance is maintained for raising the glass roof, and that objects do not project into the opening path of the luggage compartment lid.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Rear-mounted luggage rack*
A rear-mounted luggage rack is available as a special accessory for your BMW. Comply with the directions given in the installation instructions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are located under the protective covers in the bumper.
Loading the rear-mounted luggage rack
You should always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 239.
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you reliably to your destination.
Starting the navigation system*
Your navigation system can use satellites to ascertain the precise position of your vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter.
Navigation DVD
The navigation system requires a special navigation DVD. You can obtain the latest version at your BMW center.
Inserting navigation DVD
Use the lower drive for navigation DVDs.
- Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled side up.
The navigation DVD is pulled in automatically. - Wait for several seconds to allow the contents of the DVD to be read in.
Removing navigation DVD
-
Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive. -
Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected, the drive may be blocked. In this case, a message will appear on the Control Display.
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from the following options:
Entering a destination manually, see below
Entering a destination by voice commands*, refer to page 127
Selecting destination using information, refer to page 129
Selecting destination from a list, refer to Destination list, page 130
Selecting destination from address book, refer to page 131
▶ Selecting home address, refer to page 133
After selecting your destination you can proceed to start the destination guidance, refer to page 136.
You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 21.
Enter data only when the vehicle is stationary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Otherwise, vehicle occupants and other road users may be endangered.
Opening navigation
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MUNOH
This opens the start menu.
- Move the controller to the right to call up "Navigation".
- Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The following is displayed on the Control Display:
The arrow or map view during destination guidance
The destination list when destination guidance is switched off
Entering a destination manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns, refer to page 135. This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored names can be called up quickly.
-
If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller.
"New destination" is selected. -
Press the controller.
- Select "Enter address" and press the controller.
The system also supports you with the following features:
If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.
You can skip the entry of country and locality if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.
Selecting country
- Select "State / Province" or the country displayed and press the controller.
The list of available countries appears on the display.
- Select the country of destination and press the controller.
At least the town/city of the destination or its zip code must be entered in order to start the destination guidance.
Entering destination by town/city name
- Select "Town / City" or the town/city displayed and press the controller.
- Select the starting letter and press the controller.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this letter appears on the Control Display. - Delete letters, if necessary:
To delete individual numbers or letters: Move the controller towards the right to select and press the controller.
To delete all numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select ◀ and press the controller for a longer period.
- If necessary, enter more letters.
The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.
To enter spaces, if necessary: Select the _symbol and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the city or town name is selected from the list and press the controller.
Entering destination by zip code
- Select "Town / City" and press the controller.
- Enter the zip code: Select the desired digits and press the controller.
To enter spaces:
Select the _symbol and press the controller.
To delete individual numbers or letters: Move the controller towards the right to select and press the controller.
To delete all numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller for a longer period.
- Select the zip code and press the controller. The corresponding destination is displayed.
- Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.
Entering street, house number and intersection
After the street you can also enter the intersection or the house number.
Entering street and intersection
- Select "Street" or the street displayed and press the controller.
- Enter the street.
The street is entered in the same manner as the town or city.
The intersection is entered in the same way as the street.
Entering a street without entering a town/city
You can also enter a street without specifying a town/city. In this case, all streets of the same name in the designated country are offered. The corresponding town/city is displayed after the street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can negate this entry. This could be helpful in instances where the desired street does not exist in the entered town/city because it belongs to another suburb, for example.
- Move the highlight marker to the uppermost field.
The arrow is selected.
- Turn the controller to the right until you see a request to enter a street in the country, then press the controller.
- Switch to the second field from the top and enter the street.
Entering a house number
You can enter any house number stored for the street on the navigation DVD.
- Select "House number" and press the controller.
- To enter the house number: Select the desired digits and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the house number is selected and press the controller.
Starting destination guidance with manual destination entry
Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
Destination guidance starts immediately.
If you do not want to start destination guidance right away:
Select "Add to destination list" and press
the controller.
The destination is stored in the destination list, refer to page 130.
Entering a destination by voice commands*
You can enter a desired destination via the voice command system. During the destination input, you can switch between voice entry and entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate the voice command system if necessary.
You can have the possible commands read aloud via >Options<.
- Press the button on the steering wheel or in the center console.
-
Enter address
Selecting country
- Wait for the system to ask for the country of destination.
- Say the name of the destination country.
Say the name of the destination country in the language of the voice command system.
Entering a destination
The destination can be spelled or entered as an entire word.
Spelling the destination
To enter a destination, spell it in the way it is commonly spelled in the destination country. Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.
- To spell the name of a town/city: Say at least the first three letters of the town/city. The more letters you say, the more accurately the system will recognize the town/city.
The system can suggest up to 20 destinations that meet your entries. Up to 6 entries at a time appear on the Control Display.
The system suggests a location.
- Select location:
To select highlighted town/city: 'Yes'
To select other town/city: No
To select an entry, e.g. >Entry 3
To show other entries in the list:
Next page
To respell the town/city: >Repeat
The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.
Entering the destination as an entire word*
The names of towns/cities and streets located in the region in which the language of the voice command system is spoken can be entered as an entire word.
Example: to enter a U.S. destination as an entire word, the system language must be English.
Speak smoothly and at normal volume, and avoid excessive emphases and pauses.
- Wait for the system to ask for the town/city of destination.
- Say the name of the destination town/city.
The system can suggest up to 6 destinations that fit your entries.
The system suggests a location.
- Select location:
To select highlighted town/city: 'Yes'
To select other town/city: No
To select an entry, e.g. >Entry 3
To re-enter the town/city: >Repeat
To enter the town/city by spelling: >Spell<
The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.
Identical-sounding towns/cities that cannot be distinguished by the system are compiled in a separate list and shown as a destination followed by three dots.
If applicable, select this entry with 'Yes'. Then select the desired town/city from that list.
Entering street and house number
The street is entered in the same way as the destination town/city.
To enter the house number:
-
House number
- Say the house number.
House numbers of up to 4 digits can be entered.
Say the house number as individual digits.
Starting destination guidance
Start guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Storing destinations
Destinations are added to the destination list or can be stored in the address book.
'Add to destination list' or 'Add to address book'
Map-guided destination selection
If you only know the location of the town or street of destination, you can enter the destination using a map. You can use the cross-hairs to select the destination on the map and then transfer it for destination guidance.
- Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.
- Press the controller.
- Select "Input map" and press the controller.
A section of a map is displayed on the Control Display:
During destination guidance, around the current destination
With the destination guidance deactivated, around the last destination entered
- Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
To change the scale: turn the controller.
To move the map: move the controller in the desired direction.
The controller can be moved to the left, right, forwards and backwards.
-
Press the controller to transfer the destination for destination guidance or to store it. The selected destination and other menu items are displayed.
-
Select the desired menu item:
"Start route guidance" starts destination guidance.
"Show current position" places your current position at the center of the map.
"Show destination position" places the current destination at the center of the map.
"Return to map" changes back to the "Input map".
Exit the menu.
- Press the controller.
The map for destination entry can also be called up in the map display:
Select the -symbol and press the controller.
Selecting destination using information
You can have a list of selected destinations displayed, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and transfer them for destination guidance.
- Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
- Select "Information" and press the controller.
3. Select location:
On destination
On location
On a new destination"
- Press the controller.
- Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and restaurants", and press the controller.
- Enter search criteria if necessary, e.g. the maximum distance from your location.
- Select "
" and press the controller. Destinations are shown on the Control Display.
- Select a destination and press the controller.
The scope of information and symbols depends on the particular navigation DVD you are using.
- Select the desired menu item:
To transfer the address to the destination list and start destination guidance:
Select the → symbol and press the controller.
To establish a telephone connection: Select the symbol and press the controller.
To display additional destinations: Select the ◀ symbol and press the controller.
To start a new search:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols in the map display
If you select the hotel category, for example, and start a search, hotels appear on the map as symbols.
To hide the symbols in the map display:
- Select the symbol and press the controller.
- Select "Hide map icons" and press the controller.
The symbols are hidden.
To show the symbols:
Select "Show map icons" and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination list
The last 20 destinations entered into the system are shown in the destination list. You can call up these destinations and transfer them for
destination guidance.
If you are planning a longer journey, for example, you can store all the destinations you wish to drive to in the destination list in advance, refer to Entering a destination manually on page 123.
Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The destination last entered is listed first in the destination list.
→● This symbol identifies the current destination during destination guidance.
To show other destinations in the destination list:
Turn the controller.
Transferring destination for destination guidance
- Select the desired destination from the destination list and press the controller.
- Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
Editing destination list
- Select the desired destination from the destination list and press the controller.
- The selected destination can be edited:
To store the entry:
Select "Add to address book".
To display information on the destination:
Select "Information on destination".
To delete the entry: Select "Delete entry".
To delete all entries:
Select "Delete list". The destination guidance is switched off.
To change an entry:
Select "Edit". For operation, refer to
Entering destination by town/city name,
page 124.
- Press the controller.
Address book
Opening address book
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in address book
You can store approx. 100 destinations in the address book.
- Select "Address book" and press the controller.
- Select "New address" and press the controller.
- Select "Enter address" and press the controller.
- Enter the name and address, refer also to Entering a destination manually, page 123.
- Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.
The entry is stored in the address book.
You can also store a destination from the destination list in the address book, refer to page 130.
Storing current position*
The current position can be transferred to the address book.
- Select "Address book" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New address" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Use current location as address" and press the controller. The name given can be changed. For oper-
ation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 123.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.
You can also enter your current position into the address book if you have left the area covered by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must enter a name.
Selecting destinations from address book
- Select "Address book" and press the controller. The stored entries appear on the Control Display.
- Select the entry and press the controller.
To start destination guidance: Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
Changing destinations from address book
- Select "Address book" and press the controller.
-
Select the entry and press the controller.
-
Select "Edit address" and press the controller.
- Change entry. For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 123.
- Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.
Deleting individual destinations from address book
- Select "Address book" and press the controller.
- Select the entry and press the controller.
- Select "Delete address" and press the controller.
Deleting all destinations from address book
- Open the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Delete data" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Delete address book" and press the controller.
- Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Home address
You can store your current position or the current destination as the home address in the address book. This entry occupies the second position in the address book.
Storing home address
- Select "Address book" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Home address" is selected and press the controller.
-
Select "Use current location as address" or "Save current destination" during destination guidance and press the controller.
-
Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.
Using home address as destination
- Select "Home address" and press the controller.
- Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
Changing home address
- Select "Home address" and press the controller.
- Select "Edit address" and press the controller. For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 123.
Route selection
You can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like during destination entry or during destination guidance.
The route is planned according to fixed rules. The type of road is taken into account, e.g. whether it is a highway or a winding road. The road types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a result, the routes recommended by the navigation system may not always be the same ones that you would choose based on personal experience.
Changing route criteria
- Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route preference" is selected and press the controller.
The various criteria are shown on the Control Display.
- Select a route criterion for the route:
"With highways"
Highways and major traffic arteries are given priority.
"Avoid highways"
Highways are avoided as far as possible.
"Fast route"
Fast route, being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads
"Short route"
Short route, irrespective of how fast or slow progress will be
- Press the controller.
The route criterion is selected.
- If necessary, select an additional route criterion and then press the controller:
"Dynamic route"
Automatic rerouting due to traffic obstructions. Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the guided route may lead through the traffic obstruction.
"Avoid tollroads"
Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.
"Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided as far as possible.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
The route criteria can also be changed in the arrow or map display.
- Select the symbol for the route criterion and press the controller.
- Select a route criterion and press the controller.
If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid tollroads" or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take considerably longer.
Word-matching principle
The system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of towns or streets. The system runs ongoing checks, comparing your destination entries with the data stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for instant response. The benefits for you include:
Names of towns entered may differ from the official versions if you are using a spelling that is customary in another country.
Example:
Instead of the German spelling "München" you can also enter the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".
When you are entering the names of towns and streets the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough letters are available to ensure unambiguous identification.
The system offers only those letters for selection of name entries that are stored on the navigation DVD. Thus, entry of erroneous or unregistered names is impossible.
Destination guidance
Starting destination guidance
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller.
- Select the destination from the destination list and press the controller or enter a new destination, refer to page 123.
- Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
After the route has been calculated, destination guidance is indicated by arrows or a map display on the Control Display.
Destination guidance can also be started in the arrow or map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate other equipment items at any time via iDrive.
You will be notified in time of any necessary
change of direction by means of spoken instructions and the display of the direction arrows.
Via programmable memory keys
1 ... Press the key on which the desired destination has been stored, refer also to page 21.
Terminating/continuing destination guidance
In the arrow or map display
Select the symbol and press the controller.
In the destination list
This symbol indicates the current destination.
- Select the current destination and press the controller.
- Select "Stop guidance" and press the controller.
If you did not reach the destination before the end of the last journey, the following question will appear in the display at the start of the next journey:
"Continue guidance to destination?".
The destination guidance starts automatically after a short time.
To start destination guidance immediately: Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Route display
You can have the route during destination guidance displayed in various ways.
From another menu, you can switch directly to the screen last displayed, refer
to Convenient call-up of menu items on page 18.
Arrow display
- Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until
"Arrow display" is selected and press the controller.
The arrow display is shown.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/stopping destination guidance
3 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
4 Route criterion
5 Distance to the next change of direction
6 Current location
7 Direction of travel
Outline of an arrow: Destination guidance on the calculated route
Solid arrow: Arrow points as the crow flies to the calculated route whenever the vehicle is not in an area recorded on the navigation DVD, e.g. in a parking garage.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the projected time of arrival and distance to the destination is displayed in the top or bottom line of the Control Display.
The arrows change appearance before a change of direction.
1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance to change of direction
3 Change of direction
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Map display
You can have your current position displayed on a map. After starting the destination guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.
- Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired map display is selected:
"Map facing north"
"Map direction of travel"
▷ "Perspective"
- Press the controller.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/stopping destination guidance
3 Map-guided destination selection
4 Displaying the menu in which the information last selected can be shown/hidden, refer to Selecting destination using information, page 129
5 Changing map display
Map facing north"
▶ "Map direction of travel"
"Perspective"
6 Changing route criteria
7 Calling up traffic information * manually
8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
The projected time of arrival and distance to the destination is displayed in the bottom line of the Control Display.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you can have the map shown facing north or toward your current direction of travel, or in perspective. At scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater, the map is always north-oriented.
To display the combined map/arrow view:
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
- Turn the controller until "Language / Units" is selected and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Display arrow view" and press the controller.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/stopping destination guidance
3 Map-guided destination selection
4 Displaying the menu in which the information last selected can be shown/hidden, refer to Selecting destination using information, page 129
5 Changing map display
Map facing north"
▶ "Map direction of travel"
6 Changing route criteria
7 Calling up traffic information * manually
8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
The projected time of arrival and distance to the destination is displayed in the bottom line of the Control Display.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km you can have the map shown facing north or in the current direction of travel. At scales of 250 miles/
500 km or greater, the map is always north-oriented.
Changing the map display
Select the corresponding symbol and press the controller.
The next map display is displayed.
Changing the scale
Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
Displaying towns/cities and streets along the route
You can have the roads and towns along the route displayed during destination guidance.
The distances remaining to be traveled within each section of the route are also displayed.
- Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route list" is selected and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination guidance through voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off during the destination guidance in the arrow or map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
To switch the voice instructions on/off at any time:
- Press the MENTO
This opens the start menu. - Press the controller to open the menu.
- Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
- Turn the controller until "Language / Units" is selected and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Navigation voice instructions" and press the controller.
The voice instructions are switched on.
Repeating or canceling voice instructions
With the programmable buttons on the steering wheel, you can also execute the following functions, refer to page 16:
Repeat the voice instruction: Press the button.
Switch voice instructions on/off: Press the button for a longer period.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.
- Have the last voice instruction repeated, if necessary.
- Turn the button during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.
This volume is independent of the volume of the audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Changing a route
During destination guidance, you can revise the navigation system's route recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the number of miles/kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route.
- Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New route" is selected and press the controller.
- Turn the controller to enter the desired number and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit from the menu without changing the route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information*
In many metropolitan areas you can receive traffic information broadcast by radio stations. The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic control centers and the traffic information is updated periodically.
During destination guidance, the traffic information relevant to the route you are planning to take is automatically shown and, if desired, taken into account in route planning. Whether destination guidance is active or not, you can have the traffic information displayed in the map view or in the traffic info list.
Switching reception of traffic information on/off
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
- Turn the controller until "Traffic Info settings" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Traffic Info" and press the controller.
The traffic information can be received and displayed.
"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info station with the best reception.
Depending on the station, either the station name, frequency, local number or other information is displayed.
Calling up traffic information manually
During destination guidance
During destination guidance, traffic information can be displayed in the arrow or map view. If the symbol is shown with a red border, traffic information is available for the planned route.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, traffic information items along the planned route are indicated by yellow diamonds.
Traffic information on the planned route is shown first, sorted by distance from the vehicle's current position.
With destination guidance switched off
- Open the start menu.
- Move the controller to the right to call up "Navigation".
- Select "Traffic Info" and press the controller.
Traffic information on the planned route is shown first, sorted by distance from the vehicle's current position.
Displaying traffic information in map display
The traffic information icons are shown in the map display up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km. The highlighting of the stretch corresponding to the traffic report and the icons for the type of event as described below are displayed and hidden. This depends on the selected scale.
Displaying detailed traffic information
Select a traffic information item from the list and press the controller.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information icons
Traffic event displayed with map scales larger than 5 miles/10 km; arrow points in relevant direction of travel.
There are several traffic events. Switch to a smaller map scale to show more detail.
Traffic light failure
Roadworks
General traffic obstruction Transport of hazardous load Vehicle on wrong carriageway
Danger
Low clearance
No parking
Fog
Heavy rain
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road closed
Slow traffic
Traffic backup
Stopped traffic
Icy roads
Uneven surface
Accident
Lane closure
Delay
Police checkpoint
Slow traffic or other traffic event
Stop and go traffic
→→→ Stopped traffic
Traffic events in both directions of travel
Traffic information during destination guidance
In the event of a traffic obstruction on the planned route, the traffic information icons are shown with a red border.
System response will vary depending on whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected, refer to page 134.
Displaying traffic obstructions
When the navigation system receives a traffic obstruction message and "Dynamic route" is not selected, you are shown certain information, such as the length of the traffic congestion, when you are approx. 25 miles/40 km away from the traffic obstruction.
The last possible detour exit is indicated just before you reach it.
Select "Detour" and press the controller. The navigation system calculates a new route avoiding the congestion.
This information is displayed even if you have called up another application on the Control Display.
Dynamic route planning
When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route will be changed automatically in the event of a traffic obstruction. The system does not point out traffic obstructions on the original route. Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the calculated route may lead through the traffic obstruction.
Displaying current position
You can have your current position displayed even when the destination guidance is switched off.
- Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until "Current position" is selected and press the controller.
The current position of your BMW is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a town or city, your current map coordinates will appear.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position displayed on a map, refer to page 138.
What to do if ...
What to do if ...
a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruction to insert the DVD appears on the Control Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the correct DVD for the navigation system. This information is indicated on the DVD label.
you request the current position of your vehicle, but do not receive a precise display?
The system is unable to receive enough GPS signals at your current position due to obstructions, your current position is not yet available on your navigation DVD, or the system is in the process of calculating your current position. As a rule, reception is guaranteed when you are in the open.
the destination guidance does not accept a destination?
The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.
the destination guidance does not accept an address without the street name?
On the navigation DVD, no downtown area can be determined for the city or town entered. Enter any street, or a destination such as the railway station in the selected town, and then start the destination guidance.
you want to enter a destination for the destination guidance, but it is not possible to select the letters for your desired entry?
The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this case, the system will not offer you any letters to choose from. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.
the system stops furnishing directions on which way to turn as you approach intersections?
You are driving in an area that has not yet been completely recorded on the naviga-
tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a turn, you will see an arrow which indicates the general direction of your planned route. Or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new recommended route.
the navigation system does not react to entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes about 10 minutes before the system is once again operational.
Entertainment
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and external audio devices as well as their tone settings are described in this chapter.
On/off and settings
The following audio sources have shared controls and setting options:
Radio
CD player
CD changer*
Controls
The audio sources can be operated using:
▶ Buttons near the CD player
iDrive
Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11
Programmable memory keys, refer to page 21
Buttons on the CD player
1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, volume
▶ Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on the unit, the last set radio station or track is played.
Turn: adjust volume.
2 Drive for audio CDs
3 Eject CD.
4 Station scan/track search
Change radio station.
Select track for CD player and CD changer.
5 Drive for navigation DVD
Operation via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU!
This opens the start menu.
- Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
You have the following choices:
▶ "FM" and "AM": radio reception
"SAT": satellite radio*
"CD": CD player or change *
"AUX": AUX-In port, USB-audio interface
"Set": depending on the audio source, other adjustments can be made, e.g. with the radio: update station with strongest reception, store station, tone control, sample stations.
From another menu, you can switch directly to the screen last displayed, refer to Convenient call-up of menu items on page 18.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the selected audio source is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Switching on/off
To switch the entertainment audio output on or off:
Press button 1 on the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indicates that sound output is switched off.
Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase.
The tone settings are applied to all audio sources.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Changing tone settings
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Audio" and press the controller.
The tone settings can also be selected if you have called up "Entertainment" in the start menu:
Select "Set" and then "Tone", pressing the controller after each selection.
Treble and bass
- Select "Treble / Bass" and press the controller.
- Move the controller to the left or right to select "Treble" or "Bass".
- Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.
Balance and fader
You can adjust the volume distribution in the same manner as "Treble / Bass".
"Balance": left/right volume distribution
▶ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control automatically increases the volume with increasing driving speed. You can set various stages for the increase in volume.
- Select "Speed volume" and press the controller.
- Turn the controller: The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.
HiFi System Professional*
You can select a spatial sound effect that improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency ranges.
- Select "Surround Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".
- Press the controller. The spatial sound effect is switched on. To switch off the spatial sound effect: Select "Off" and press the controller.
Individual High-End Audio System*
You can choose between stereo and multichannel playback, surround.
- Select "Surround Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Stereo" or "Surround".
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
- Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.
- Move the controller to the left or right to select the desired frequency range.
- Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default setting.
- Open the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Audio" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Reset" is selected and press the controller.
- In vehicles equipped with two drives: Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM wavebands.
Listening to the radio
Press the button if the sound output is switched off.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "FM" or "AM".
- Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display on the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre-sets".
If "Autostore" does not show a station in the AM waveband or if the displayed stations are no longer receivable, update the stations with the best reception, refer to page 155.
Changing stations
Turn the controller.
Buttons on the CD player
Press the button for the corresponding direction.
The system switches to the next displayed station.
You can also change the station with the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Changing selection criteria
In addition to the stations currently displayed, you can have stations with another selection criterion displayed.
You can choose from the following selection criteria:
"All stations":
Stations that can currently be received on the "FM" waveband.
▶ "Autostore":
Stations with the best reception on the "AM" waveband. For High Definition Radio: stations with the best reception on the "FM" waveband.
▷ "Presets":
Stations you have previously stored, refer to page 156.
"Manual":
To set stations that can be received in addition to those already being displayed, refer to Selecting the frequency manually, page 155.
To change the selection criterion:
- Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.
- Choose a selection criterion and press the controller.
Sampling stations, Scan
The stations on the current waveband are automatically sampled in succession.
- Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected. - Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed. - Select "Scan" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled.
Stop sampling:
- Press the controller.
- Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Station sampling is interrupted and the selected station stays on.
Buttons on the CD player
To sample stations, press the button for the corresponding direction for an extended time.
To stop scanning, press the button again.
Selecting the frequency manually
With "Manual" you can select stations that can be received in addition to those displayed.
- Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.
- Select "Manual" and press the controller.
- Turn the controller to set a certain frequency.
Updating stations with best reception
If on a longer journey you move out of the reception range of the stations originally received, you can update the list of stations received with the strongest signals in the AM waveband.
- Select "AM" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.
- Select "Autostore" and press the controller. "Set" is selected.
- Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
- Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of the stations with the strongest reception is updated. The frequencies of the stations are displayed.
Storing stations
Via iDrive
- Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired selection criterion is chosen and press the controller.
- Select the desired frequency or station. "Set" is selected.
-
Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
-
Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
- Turn the controller until the desired memory location is selected.
- Press the controller. The station is stored.
The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a station on the programmable memory keys, refer also to page 21.
- Select a station.
- ... Press the desired key for a longer period.
Changing a memory position
- Select "Presets" and press the controller.
- Select the desired station. "Set" is selected.
-
Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
-
Select "Store" and press the controller.
- Turn the controller until the desired memory location is selected. The number of the memory location appears beside the name or frequency of the station.
- Press the controller. The station is stored.
Radio Data System RDS
On the FM waveband, additional information is broadcast via RDS. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. Where reception is poor or in the event of interference, it may take some time before the station names will appear in the display.
Switching RDS on/off*
- Select "FM" and press the controller. "Set" is selected.
- Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
- Select "RDS" and press the controller.
RDS is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit analog and digital signals. You can receive these stations digitally for improved sound quality.
A digital radio network must be available to be able to receive digital stations.
Switching digital radio reception on/off iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Audio" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "HD radio" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Off" and press the controller.
☐ Digital station reception is now switched on.
This symbol is displayed when a station is received digitally.
Some stations do not transmit the digital and analog signals simultaneously. If you are in an area in which digital reception of the selected station is not possible continuously, reception will alternate between analog and digital. This can cause repetitions or interruptions. In this case it may be preferable to switch off digital reception.
Selecting the programs of a digital station*
Some stations broadcast several programs on a single frequency. To select one of these programs:
- Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
- Select "Manual" and press the controller.
- Select a station that can be received digitally.
This symbol is displayed when a station is received digitally.
- Change to the next program of the digital station using the buttons on the radio or steering wheel.
You can store a station, refer to page 156.
Updating digitally receivable stations
If on a longer journey you move out of the reception range of the stations originally received, you can update the list of stations received with the strongest signals.
- Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.
- Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
- Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
- Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of the digitally receivable stations is updated. This can take up to 2 minutes.
Displaying additional information
With digital stations, additional information on the current track can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
- Select the station and press the controller.
- Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is displayed.
When you change to another digitally received station, any additional information is displayed after a brief interruption.
Satellite radio*
You can receive over 100 different channels with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined packages. To receive the channels of your choice, you must have the corresponding packages enabled.
With this new technology, signal losses can occur from time to time and result in interruptions.
Enabling or disabling channels
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the
This opens the start menu. - Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
- Select "SAT".
- Press the controller.
The channels are displayed.
√ These channels are enabled.
Enabling
- Select a channel that has not yet been enabled and press the controller. A telephone number and the electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is required for enabling or disabling.
- To enable the channel: Dial the phone number.
Disabling
- Select an enabled channel and press the controller.
- Select "ESN" and press the controller. The electronic serial number, ESN, is displayed.
The electronic serial number is required for disabling.
- To disable the channel: Dial the phone number.
Selecting and storing a channel
- Select "SAT" and press the controller.
Channels and categories are displayed on the Control Display.
- Select a menu item:
"Presets": Up to twelve channels you stored previously.
All channels are displayed.
"Categories": All channels, sorted by category, e.g. news, jazz.
-
Press the controller.
-
If "Categories" has been selected: Select the desired category and press the controller.
The channels of this category are displayed.
- Select a channel marked with this symbol.
-
Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
-
Select "Details" and press the controller.
Additional information
The name of the channel and additional information on the current track are displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
1 Artist
2 Track
Storing a channel
- Select the desired channel.
- Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed. - Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
- Turn the controller to select a memory location and press the controller.
The channel is stored. The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed again after a short time.
Changing channels with buttons on CD player
Press the button for the corresponding direction.
The system switches to the next enabled channel.
Notes
When more than 4 seconds go by and no signal is received, a message appears on the Control Display.
Under some circumstances, e.g. depending on environmental or topographic conditions, it may not be possible to receive any signal. The satellite radio cannot influence this. A signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages, next to high-rise buildings, in the vicinity of trees, mountains or other strong sources of radio interference.
Reception usually resumes as soon as the signal becomes available again.
CD player and CD changer*
Listening to CDs
Compressed audio files
CDs with compressed audio files, MP3s, can be played by the CD player and CD changer.
Starting the CD player
The upper drive is for audio CDs.
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side up.
The CD is pulled in automatically. Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. When playing CDs with compressed audio files, it can take the CD player approx. 1 minute to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.
To start playback when there is already a CD in the drive:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
-
Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
-
If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. On cars with a CD changer, select "CD" and press the controller to start the CD player.
Playback starts automatically if the sound output is switched on.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store the CD player function on the programmable memory keys to start the CD player, refer to page 21.
Starting the CD changer
Fill and insert the CD magazine, refer to page 167.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
-
Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
-
If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Select the desired CD and press the controller.
At the end of the last track, the next CD is selected and played.
If new CDs have been placed in the CD magazine, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g. CD 1, track 1.
The CD magazine's load status is indicated on the Control Display.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a CD compartment of the CD changer on the programmable memory keys to start the CD changer, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
Buttons on the CD player
Press the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until the desired track is reached.
The track is displayed on the Control Display. You can also change the track with the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Via iDrive
Turn the controller to select a track.
Compressed audio files*
- Select a directory, if necessary, and press the controller.
- Select a track and press the controller.
To change the directory: Select the directory and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
If the car is equipped with two CD drives, you can save specific tracks on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 21.
Displaying information about the track*
With compressed audio files, any information about the current track that has been recorded can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
- Press the controller.
- Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is shown for the current track.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Sampling tracks, Scan
All tracks on the current CD are automatically sampled once in succession.
- Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
- Select "Scan" and press the controller.
V2015/07/08/9
Stop sampling:
- Press the controller.
- Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Track sampling is interrupted and the selected track is played on.
Compressed audio files*
- Select the current track and press the controller.
- Select the desired menu item:
To sample all the tracks in the current directory, select "Scan directory" and press the controller.
To sample all the tracks on the CD, select "Scan all" and press the controller.
V2188010569
Stop sampling:
- Press the controller.
- Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and press the controller.
Sampling is interrupted and the selected track is retained.
Repeating tracks
- Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
- Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
The current track on the CD is repeated.
Stop repeating:
-
Press the controller again.
-
Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files*
-
Select the current track and press the controller.
-
Select the desired menu item:
To repeat the selected track, select "Repeat track" and press the controller.
To repeat all the tracks in the current directory, select "Repeat directory" and press the controller.
Stop repeating:
- Press the controller.
- Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory" and press the controller.
Random play sequence
The tracks on the current CD are played once each in random order.
- Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
- Select "Random" and press the controller.
Stop random function: - Press the controller.
- Select "Random" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files*
-
Select the current track and press the controller.
-
Select the desired menu item:
To play all the tracks in the current directory in random order, select "Random directory" and press the controller.
To play all the tracks on the CD in random order, select "Random all" and press the controller.
Stop random function:
- Press the controller.
- Select "Random directory" or "Random all" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.
The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is distorted.
CD magazine
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the left side panel in the cargo bay.
Removing the CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine, you must first remove it from the CD changer:
- Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
- Press the button, arrow 2. The CD magazine is ejected.
Inserting/removing CDs from the CD magazine
When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.
Inserting CDs:
Insert the CD in its slot with the label side on top.
Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired drawer, see arrow, and remove the CD.
Inserting the CD magazine
Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direction of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.
The CD changer automatically reads in the loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged, otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat build-up and can cause irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, otherwise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD Plus , otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/DVDs, one of the following factors may be the cause.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen designed for this purpose.
Damage prevention
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.
Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 120°F/50°C, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.
Care
Clean the reflective signal side of CDs/DVDs as needed by wiping it with a commercially available cleaning tissue in straight lines from the center of the disc outwards.
AUX-In port
You can connect an external audio device, for instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system. You can adjust the tone using iDrive.
Connecting
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system, connect the headset or line-out port of the external device to the AUX-in port.
Starting audio playback
The audio device must be switched on.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
-
Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
-
If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "AUX" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "AUX IN" and press the controller.
- Adjust volume and tone, if necessary.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store the "AUX" function on the programmable memory keys to start audio playback, refer to page 21.
USB-audio interface*
You can connect audio devices, e.g. an iPod or a USB device (MP3 player, USB stick), to the USB-audio interface. They can be operated via iDrive.
Standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U format can be played.
Due the variety of audio devices on the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every device will be operable on the vehicle.
Ask your BMW center about what audio devices are suitable.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
1 Connection for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2 USB interface
Depending on your vehicle's equipment version, it may contain a storage pouch for your audio device. The pouch is located under the center armrest.
iPod
To connect the iPod use the BMW cable adapter for Apple iPod. For more information, contact your BMW center or go to the Internet: www.bmw.com
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loudspeaker system, connect the iPod to ports 1 and 2.
The iPod's menu structure is supported by the USB-audio interface.
USB device
To connect the device, use the included flexible adapter cable to protect the USB interface and your USB device against physical damage.
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loudspeaker system, connect the USB device to port 2.
After the device is connected for the first time, the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of music) and the playlists are transferred from the USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may take some time. The duration depends on the USB device and the number of tracks.
During transfer, you can select the tracks using the directories and file names.
After transfer, you can call up the tracks using the information and playlists.
Information from up to four USB devices or for about 20,000 tracks can be stored on the vehicle.
If a fifth USB device is connected and if more than 20,000 tracks are to be stored, the information on existing tracks may be lost.
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be played.
Starting audio playback
Via iDrive
If the audio device has a device name, the name is displayed.
- Press the MUNOH
This opens the start menu. -
Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
-
If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "AUX" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "USB" or the name of the audio device and press the controller.
Playback begins with the first track.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store the "USB" function on the programmable memory keys to start audio playback, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
You can call up the tracks using the playlists and information. With USB devices you can also call up tracks using the file directory. The tracks can be displayed if they have been stored in the Latin alphabet.
- Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Artists", and press the controller.
- Select a track and press the controller.
Displaying information about the track
Any information about the current track that has been recorded can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
- Press the controller during playback.
- Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is shown for the current track.
Repeating tracks
- Select the current track and press the controller.
- Select "Repeat track" and press the controller.
Stop repeating:
- Press the controller.
- Select "Repeat track" and press the controller.
Random play sequence
You can play the tracks in the selected list in random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.
- Select the current track and press the controller.
- Select "Random" and press the controller. Stop random play:
- Press the controller.
- Select "Random" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the steering wheel or CD player:
Press and hold the button for the ling direction.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
very high temperatures, refer to the operating instructions of the audio device. Otherwise the
audio device may become damaged, which could compromise safety while driving.
Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, the files may not play back correctly in every case.
Notes on connecting
The USB-audio interface acts as the power supply to the connected audio devices, provided that this is supported by the audio device. Therefore, do not connect the USB audio device to the power socket in the vehicle during operation.
Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB-audio interface.
Do not connect USB hard disks.
Do not use the USB-audio interface to charge external devices.
Communications
This chapter describes how to use the telephone, BMW Assist and BMW TeleServices.
Telephoning*
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone preparation package. After pairing a suitable mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can operate the mobile phone via iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel or via voice commands.
Once a mobile phone has been paired with your vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. You can store the pairing data for up to four mobile phones simultaneously. If several mobile phones are detected at the same time, the mobile phone last paired can be operated via the vehicle.
Using the telephone inside the vehicle
Using the snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile phone's battery and connect the mobile phone to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures better network reception and consistent reproduction quality. Please contact your BMW center to find out for which mobile phones there are snap-in adapters available.
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in many ways, and can even save lives in an emergency. While you should consult your mobile phone's separate Owner's Manual for a detailed description of safety precautions and information, we request that you direct your particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situation allows you to do so. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not observe this precaution, your being dis-
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.
Suitable mobile phones
Please ask your BMW center which mobile phones with Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package and which mobile phones are compatible with the snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular software versions, these mobile phones support the functions described in this Owner's Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones.
Care instructions
Important information on this subject can be found in the separate mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone* using:
▶ Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11
iDrive, refer to page 181
▶ Voice commands, refer to page 187
Programmable memory keys, refer to page 21
Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, otherwise malfunctions may result.
Making phone calls with the BMW Assist system*: BMW Assist calls
You can use the BMW Assist System via the hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.
When the status information "BMW Assist" or "BMW Service" is displayed in "Communication", only BMW Assist calls are possible.
It may not be possible to establish a telephone connection using the mobile phone while a connection is being established to BMW Assist or while a call to BMW Assist is already in progress. If this happens, you must unpair the mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to place a call with the mobile phone.
Start-up
Pairing the mobile phone with the vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
Compatible mobile phone: the mobile phone is supported by the full preparation package mobile phone. You can obtain information on the Internet at: www.bmw.com
The mobile phone is ready to operate.
The Bluetooth link is activated in the vehicle, refer to page 181, and in the mobile phone.
Depending on the mobile phone, some default settings may be necessary for the mobile phone: e.g. using the following menu items:
Bluetooth switched on
▶ Connection without confirmation
Reconnection
Depending on the mobile phone type, the power-saving mode setting, for example, may result in a paired mobile phone not being detected by the vehicle.
For pairing purposes, define any number as the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Bluetooth passkey is no longer required after pairing has been successful.
The ignition is switched on.
Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle only when the car is stationary, to avoid endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.
Switch on ignition
- Insert remote control all the way into the ignition lock.
- Switch on ignition without operating the brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop button.
Preparation via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU to call up the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top, select "Phone" and press the controller.
- Select "Pair new phone" and press the controller.
- Select "Start pairing" and press the controller.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.
Preparation via the mobile phone
-
Further steps must be carried out with the mobile phone and vary depending on the model. Please refer to your mobile phone's operating instructions, e.g. under the topics of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Linking or Pairing. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle also appears on the mobile phone display.
-
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will see messages, first on the mobile phone display or on the iDrive, requesting you to enter the same Bluetooth passkey previously determined by you.
- Enter the Bluetooth passkey. Depending on the mobile phone, you will have approx. 30 seconds to enter your Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and the Control Display.
- Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top, select "Confirm passkey" and press the controller.
- Wait several seconds until the "Communication" menu is displayed.
The next time you use the mobile phone inside the vehicle, it will be recognized within no more than 2 minutes as long as the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
With some mobile phones it may be necessary to make certain settings for a permanent Bluetooth link, e.g. using the authorization or secure connection menu item, refer to your mobile phone's operating instructions.
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle. This data transfer depends on your mobile phone and can take several minutes; please refer to your mobile phone's operating instructions, if necessary.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
Transfer all phone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone, if necessary.
Phone book entries with special characters may not be displayed.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired, one after the other. If a fifth mobile phone is paired, the pairing data for the mobile phone whose pairing data was first stored on the vehicle is deleted.
Checks to perform if pairing is unsuccessful
Is the mobile phone supported by the mobile phone preparation package? You can obtain information on the Internet at: www.bmw.com.
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and vehicle match? The same Bluetooth passkey must be entered on the mobile phone's display and via iDrive.
Did it take you more than 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth passkey?
Only a limited number of devices can be connected with the mobile phone. If necessary, delete connections with other devices.
Is the mobile phone no longer responding? Switch the mobile phone off and on or briefly disconnect the power supply.
To repeat pairing:
- Select "Restart pairing" and press the controller.
(请见以下内容内容)
- Repeat steps 9 to 14.
If pairing fails again, contact BMW Customer Relations.
To call BMW Customer Relations: Select "Help" and press the controller.
(总第72319年05月05日)
The phone number for BMW Customer Relations and information necessary for pairing appear on the display. In mobile phones that are already connected, you can select the BMW Customer Relations phone number to place the call.
(1) 2017年1月1日
List of paired mobile phones
Mobile phones with pairing data stored by the vehicle can be displayed. If several mobile phones are detected by the vehicle at the same
time, the mobile phone at the top of the list can be operated via the vehicle.
You can change the order of the mobile phones on the list. As long as a mobile phone from this list is selected, you cannot operate the mobile phones via the vehicle.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU to call up the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top, select "Phone" and press the controller.
- Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.
- Select "Move device up" and press the controller.
The selected mobile phone moves up one position on the list.
Unpairing the mobile phone from the vehicle
Should you no longer wish to operate a mobile phone via the vehicle, you can delete the mobile phone's pairing data.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Switch off the mobile phone.
- Press the MENU to call up the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller. "Bluetooth" is selected.
- Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top, select "Phone" and press the controller.
- Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.
- Select "Delete device" and press the controller.
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list.
The phone book entries and the lists of stored phone numbers are deleted as well.
Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from the list of accepted calls
Ending a call
When the ignition and radio readiness are switched off, e.g. after taking the remote control out of the ignition switch, you can continue an ongoing call via the hands-free system for no more than 25 minutes.
Voice quality
If the person you are talking to is having difficulties understanding you, this may be due to excessive background noise. The full mobile phone preparation package can compensate for these noises to a certain extent. To optimize voice quality during a call, we recommend that you:
Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing the windows, reducing air flow from the automatic climate control or by pointing the open front air vents downward
Reduce the volume of the hands-free system
Requirements
The mobile phone's pairing data are stored by the vehicle and the mobile phone is operational.
The engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
The mobile phone is recognized by the vehicle.
Calling up communication
Many of the functions described below are controlled using the "Communication" menu.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU to call up the start menu.
- Move the controller forwards to call up "Communication".
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller stored in the phone book and the phone number has been transmitted, the name of the entry is displayed.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternatively:
"Accept" is selected.
Press the controller.
Rejecting a call
Select "Reject" and press the controller. The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has been activated.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
- Select "Phone" and press the controller.
- Select "Dial" and press the controller.
- Enter the desired phone number by selecting the digits individually and pressing the controller.
Always enter the complete phone number consisting of national dialing code, area code, and phone number.
The letters correspond to the numbers on the keypad of the mobile phone.
To delete the last digit:
Move the controller towards the right to select the arrow and press the controller.
- Select "Dial number" and press the controller.
Alternatively: press the button on the steering wheel.
For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are talking to, the display of phone numbers must be enabled by your provider.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store phone numbers on the programmable memory keys to call these numbers directly, refer to page 21.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternatively:
- Select the phone number and press the controller.
- "End call" is selected. Press the controller.
Selecting a phone number from the phone book or from a list of stored phone numbers
Phone numbers you have dialed, received calls and phone book entries are stored in lists when the mobile phone is linked to the vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is listed in the phone book, the name of the entry is displayed instead of the phone number.
You can select the desired subscriber from the list and establish the connection.
Five lists are available:
▷ "A - Z"
The entries in your mobile phone's phone
book, consisting of names and phone numbers, are sorted alphabetically.
"Top 8"
The eight numbers dialed most frequently from the "A - Z" phone book are automatically stored in the Top 8 list.
▶ "Redial"
The last eight phone numbers you have dialed are automatically stored. The last number dialed is at the top of the list.
"Missed calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight rejected calls are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been transmitted.
▶ "Received calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight accepted calls are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been transmitted.
Selecting phone numbers from phone book
The "A - Z" list is available for your phone book entries. The phone book entries appear on the Control Display.
- Select "Phone" and press the controller.
-
Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
-
To limit the number of displayed entries, select the initial letter of the desired entry and press the controller.
-
Select the desired entry and press the controller.
- Select "Call" and press the controller. The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and home, the name is shown once for each phone number.
You can change a phone number stored in the phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
- Select "Phone" and press the controller.
- Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
- Select the desired entry and press the controller.
- Select "Add digits" and press the controller.
- Change the phone number.
- Select "Dial number" and press the controller.
Dialing a stored phone number from a list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
-
Select "Phone" and press the controller.
-
Select a list and press the controller:
"Top 8"
"Redial"
"Missed calls"
"Received calls"
- Select the desired entry and press the controller.
- Select "Call" and press the controller. The system dials the number.
Deleting an individual entry
- Select the desired entry from the list and press the controller.
- Select "Delete" and press the controller. The entry is deleted.
Deleting the entire list
- Select an entry from the list and press the controller.
- Select "Delete all numbers" and press the controller.
- If applicable, select "Yes" and press the controller. The list is deleted.
BMW Contact*
If BMW Assist has not been enabled for you, you can have several service numbers displayed:
BMW Roadside Assistance* if you need help in the event of a breakdown
BMW Service if you wish to schedule a service appointment, for example
BMW Customer Relations* for information related to your vehicle
If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 191.
You can dial the displayed service numbers if your mobile phone has been paired with the vehicle:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
-
Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".
-
Select "BMW Contact" and press the controller.
- Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press the controller.
- Select one of the following menu items and press the controller:
"Roadside Assistance"
"Customer Relations"
"Service Request"
- Select "Call" and press the controller.
Contact will be established.
Dialing phone numbers via touch tones
Touch-tone dialing is required for access to network services or for controlling devices, e.g. for remote querying on an answering machine.
This function is available whenever there is a connection.
- Establish connection.
- Move the controller backwards until the bottom field is selected.
- Select the desired touch-tone character and press the controller. Each selection is transmitted immediately and is confirmed by a tone, depending on the type of mobile phone you are using.
Switching between mobile phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free system*
You can continue ongoing calls outside of the vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free system as long as the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Depending on your mobile phone, the system automatically switches to hands-free mode.
With mobile phones that do not automatically switch to hands-free mode:
Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using, it may be possible to continue the conversation via the hands-free system. Refer to the display on your mobile phone
and/or your mobile phone's operating instructions.
Press the button above the storage compartment.
From hands-free system to mobile phone
If you are making a call via the hands-free system, it may be possible to continue the call via the mobile phone, depending on your mobile phone model. Refer to the display on your mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's operating instructions.
Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth link.
Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using, it may occur that calls are switched from the hands-free system to the mobile phone if reception of the wireless network is poor.
Operation by voice commands*
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without having to take a hand off the steering wheel. During your entries, you will be guided in many cases by announcements or questions.
The same prerequisites apply as for operation via iDrive, refer to page 181.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
〉...〈Say the specified commands word for word. 〉〉...〈Indicates responses of the system.
Saying commands
Activating the system
- Briefly press the button on the steering wheel.
A sound signal indicates that you can say commands. - Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice commands
Press the button on the steering wheel or
Cancel<.
In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g. a name rather than a command, canceling is only possible using the button on the steering wheel.
Having the possible commands read aloud
The system recognizes specific commands that must be pronounced exactly word for word. You can have the possible commands for any function read aloud to you:
Help<
Using alternative commands
Often there is more than a single command to run a function, e.g.:
Dial name< or >Name<.
Digits from zero to nine are recognized.
You can say each digit individually or group them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
Example: dialing phone numbers
Start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Command Voice control response
Dial number<
Please say the number<<
e.g. >123 456 7890
Depending on your equipment version:
123 456 7890. Continue?<< or
123 456 7890. And next?
Dial<
Dialing number<<
Adjusting the volume of the instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions from the system:
Turn the button during an instruction.
This volume for the instructions is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
-
Dial number<.
- Say the phone number. For telephone calls abroad, say 'Plus' and then the country code.
-
Dial<.
The connection to the desired subscriber is established.
Correcting phone numbers
After the last spoken sequence of digits has been repeated by the system, you can delete this sequence of digits.
Correct number<.
The digits are deleted.
The command >Correct number< can be repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone numbers
Delete<.
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book
The phone book entries can be called up automatically from your mobile phone's memory.
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established.
-
Dial name<.
The dialog for selecting an entry is opened. - Say the name when prompted.
- Confirm the prompt with >Yes<.
Redialing
The >Redial< command calls up "Redial".
Notes
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, bear in mind the following:
▶ Pronounce the commands smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.
Keep the doors, windows and glass roof closed to prevent interference from outside noise.
Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.
Inserting/removing snap-in adapter*
- Press area 1 around the button and take off the cover*.
- Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and press it downward until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter: Press area 1.
NOTICE
Inserting mobile phone
- If applicable, remove the protective cap from the mobile phone's antenna connector so that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.
- With its buttons facing upward, slide the mobile phone up towards the electrical contact points and press it downward until it engages.
(1) 2017年
The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steering is unlocked.
To conserve battery power, you should avoid using the mobile phone when the ignition is switched off.
Removing mobile phone
1983年7月12日
Press the button.
BMW Assist*
BMW Assist provides you with various services. For example, the position data of your vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center if an Emergency Request* has been sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the individually agreed contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you having to visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist service will be available. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed.
Requirements
You can use BMW Assist when the following requirements are met:
The installed BMW Assist system is logged on to a mobile phone network. This network must be capable of transmitting the services.
To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine the current position.
To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS signal must be available.
You have subscribed to BMW Assist with your BMW center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling must have been completed.
BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 196.
Offered services
The following services are available via BMW Assist:
Emergency Request, refer to page 229: When you press the SOS button, a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center. The BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you.
▶ Automatic Collision Notification: Under certain conditions, a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you.
Enhanced Roadside Assistance: You can call BMW Roadside Assistance* should you require help in the event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and position data are transmitted during this call.
▶ Customer Relations:
For all information related to your vehicle you can be connected with BMW Customer Relations.
BMW TeleServices*: Data on your vehicle's service status or required inspections are transmitted to your BMW center either automatically before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appointment.
Remote Door Unlock: Contact the BMW Assist Response Center if your remote control or key is not available and you would like to have the vehicle unlocked.
Stolen Vehicle Recovery: After you report your vehicle stolen with the police, call the BMW Assist Response Center to determine its position.
In addition, optional services can be provided to you, such as the Concierge service or information on directions, traffic or the weather. You can use Critical Calling to activate a limited number of calls via the BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. when you do not have your mobile phone with you.
Press the SOS button in order to contact the BMW Assist Response Center, see below.
You can also access the BMW Assist Concierge service via the Internet.
Characteristics of the offered services
The following characteristics apply to the services:
The services offered are country-specific.
Voice contact is established or data are transferred, depending on the equipment and the country. In some countries, it is possible to do both.
The data transmitted can be vehicle data, for example, your current position or the Condition Based Service CBS data.
Using services
Contacting the BMW Assist Response Center
You can contact the BMW Assist Response Center via the SOS button.
- Briefly press the cover flap to open. The arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps varies slightly among vehicle equipment versions.
- Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with BMW Roadside Assistance.
Roadside Assistance
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENB
This opens the start menu.
- Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Roadside Assistance" and press the controller.
If the current location can be determined, the current vehicle position is displayed.
- Select "Start service" and press the controller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with BMW Roadside Assistance.
BMW TeleServices*
Automatic BMW Teleservice Call*
The data on the service status of your vehicle or on required inspections are transmitted automatically prior to the due date. You can check when the BMW center was notified.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu. - Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Info sources" and press the controller.
-
Select "Service Info" and press the controller.
-
If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Auto Request" and press the controller.
v301201049
Manual BMW Teleservice Call
You can transmit data regarding your vehicle's service status to your BMW center when you wish to arrange a service appointment.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu. - Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.
Vermilion
- Select "Service Request" and press the controller.
无法识别的
- Select "Start service" and press the controller.
The service-relevant data are transmitted. Your BMW center will contact you to arrange a service appointment.
Displaying and updating* BMW TeleServices
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "BMW Service settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Enabled TeleServices" and press the controller.
The activated BMW TeleServices are displayed.
- Select "Options" and press the controller.
- Select "Update services" and press the controller.
Contacting BMW Customer Relations
For all information related to your vehicle you can call BMW Customer Relations.
- Press the MENU!
This opens the start menu. - Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Customer Relations".
- Press the controller.
- Select "Start service" and press the controller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with BMW Customer Relations.
Concierge service*
When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you can obtain information about, e.g., current events, gas stations or hotels, as well as receive the corresponding telephone numbers and addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly through the BMW Assist Concierge service.
Concierge service requires additional enabling by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Calling the Concierge
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu. - Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Concierge" and press the controller.
- Select "Start service" and press the controller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with a BMW Assist Concierge.
Displaying transmitted data
Select a received message, if applicable, and press the controller.
Dialing a phone number or transferring an address for destination guidance
- Select "Options" and press the controller.
- Select a menu item:
Press "Call" to make a telephone call. A prerequisite for this is that your Bluetooth mobile phone has been paired with the vehicle.
Press "Select as destination" to transfer the address to the navigation system for destination guidance.
Adapting BMW Assist
Displaying and updating services
If the services offered by BMW Assist change, you will be notified. In that event you may update the service functions.
- Press the MENU
This opens the start menu. -
Press the controller to open the menu.
-
Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
- Turn the controller until "BMW Service settings" is selected and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Enabled Assist services" is selected and press the controller. The currently available BMW Assist services are displayed.
- If necessary, select "Options" and press the controller.
- Select "Update services" and press the controller.
Activating BMW Assist
BMW Assist must be activated to use the services.
Requirements
Make sure that the vehicle can determine its current location. Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
Leave vehicle ignition switched on during the activation process.
Activating
- Press the MENB. This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
- Turn the controller until "BMW Service settings" is selected and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Enabled Assist services" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "Enable services" and press the controller.
BMW Assist is activated and data exchange with the BMW Assist Response Center begins.
Activation takes a few minutes. Progress status is displayed on the Control Display. If you open another menu, the activation process continues in the background.
Displaying vehicle data
When BMW Assist is enabled, you can have the system display the Telematics ID. The Telematics ID identifies your vehicle. These data are transmitted to your BMW center.
- Press the MENOH
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
- Select "BMW Service settings" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Assist profile" is selected and press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the Bluetooth link
The use of Bluetooth technology is not permitted in all countries. Observe all applicable local regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone, if necessary. If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle, and other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be used in combination with the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop.
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and your mobile phone:
- Press the MENU to call up the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
- Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top, select "Settings" and press the controller.
- Select "Bluetooth communication active" and press the controller to activate or deactivate the link.
The Bluetooth link is activated.
☐ The Bluetooth link is deactivated.
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions using iDrive:
Accepting/rejecting calls
Dialing phone numbers
Selecting phone numbers from the phone book
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your car's mobility by supplying important information on vital topics including fuels and lubricants, wheels and tires, service, maintenance and roadside assistance.
Refueling
Always switch off the engine before refueling, otherwise, fuel cannot be added to nk and a message will be displayed.
Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when ing fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con- s in your vehicle. They can develop a leak cause an explosion or cause a fire in the of an accident.
Fuel filler door
Opening
- Open fuel filler door. To do so, lightly press the rear edge.
- Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.
- Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler door.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the cap, otherwise the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or missing.
Manually releasing the fuel filler door
In the event of a malfunction, you can release the fuel filler door manually:
- Remove the cover from the right-hand sidewall of the cargo bay.
- Pull the button with the fuel pump symbol down.
The fuel filler door is released.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety instructions provided at filling stations, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or property damage.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead to
premature pump shutoff
reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recovery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 14 US gallons/53 liters, including the reserve capacity of 2.1 US gallons/8 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.
Fuel specifications
Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel, as this would cause permanent damage to the
catalytic converter.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing 85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise the engine and fuel supply system will be damaged.
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:
128i: 87
135i:89
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use any gasoline below the specified minimum fuel grade. Otherwise the e could be damaged.
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant differences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10% ethanol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in driveability, starting and stalling problems especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude.
Should you encounter driveability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pressure.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that can not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident. Do not drive with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using Run-Flat Tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the vehicle.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 86, or the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 84.
Inflation pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recommended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW center.
For correct identification of the right tire inflation pressures, observe the following:
▶ Tire sizes for your vehicle
Load conditions
▶ Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the columns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's-side door post when the driver's door is open.
The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.
Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the columns for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.
Observe all national and local maximum speed limits, otherwise violations of the laws could occur.
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 128i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
| Traveling speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/h | Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 m p h / 160 km / h | |||||
| All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature |  |  |  | |||
| 195/55 R 16 87 H M+S | 32/220 | 38/260 | 32/220 | 35/240 | 35/240 | 42/290 |
| 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S205/50 R 17 89 H M+S | 32/220 | 35/240 | 32/220 | 35/240 | 42/290 | |
| Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V | 32/220 | - | 32/220 | - | 35/240 | - |
| Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V | - | 35/240 | - | 35/240 | - | 42/290 |
| Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y | 32/220 | - | 32/220 | - | 35/240 | - |
| Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y | - | 35/240 | - | 35/240 | - | 42/290 |
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 239.
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 135i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
| Traveling speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/h | Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 m p h / 160 km / h | ||||
| All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature |  |  |  | ||
| 205/50 R 17 89 H M+S | 33/230 | 36/250 | 33/230 | 36/250 | 38/260 |
| Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y | 36/250 | - | 36/250 | - | 38/260 |
| Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y | - | 36/250 | - | 36/250 | - |
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 239.
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 128i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
| Traveling speedsup to a max. of100 m p h / 160 km/h | Traveling speedsincluding those exceeding100 mph / 160 km/h | ||
| All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.Cold = ambient temperature |  |  |  |
without Sports package
| 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S | 32/220 | 35/240 | 32/220 | 35/240 | 32/220 | 39/270 |
| 205/50 R 17 89 H M+S | 32/220 | 38/260 | 32/220 | 35/240 | 35/240 | 42/290 |
| Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V | 32/220 | - | 32/220 | - | 35/240 | - |
| Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V | - | 35/240 | - | 35/240 | - | 39/270 |
| Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y | 35/240 | - | 32/220 | - | 35/240 | - |
| Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y | - | 39/270 | - | 35/240 | - | 39/270 |
with Sports package
| 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S | 32/220 | 35/240 | 32/220 | 35/240 | 32/220 | 39/270 |
| 205/50 R 17 89 H M+S | 32/220 | 38/260 | 33/230 | 36/250 | 36/250 | 44/300 |
| Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V | 32/220 | - | 33/230 | - | 36/250 | - |
| Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V | - | 35/240 | - | 36/250 | - | 44/300 |
| Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y | 35/240 | - | 33/230 | - | 36/250 | - |
| Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y | - | 39/270 | - | 36/250 | - | 44/300 |
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 239.
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 135i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
| Traveling speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/h | Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 m p h / 160 km / h | |||||
| All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature |  |  |  | |||
| 205/50 R 17 89 H M+S | 33/220 | 38/260 | 32/220 | 35/240 | 36/250 | 42/290 |
| Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y | 39/270 | - | 39/270 | - | 39/270 | - |
| Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y | - | 39/270 | - | 39/270 | - | 39/270 |
| with Sports package | ||||||
| 205/50 R 17 89 H M+S | 33/220 | 38/260 | 33/230 | 36/250 | 38/260 | 45/310 |
| Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y | 39/270 | - | 38/260 | - | 39/270 | - |
| Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y | - | 39/270 | - | 38/260 | - | 45/310 |
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 239.
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.
Tire size
Speed code letter
Q = up to 1 0 0 mph or 1 6 0 km/h T = up to 1 1 8 mph or 1 9 0 km/h H = up to 1 3 1 mph or 2 1 0 km/h V = up to 1 5 0 mphor 2 4 0 km/h W = up to 1 6 7 mph or 2 7 0 km/h Y = up to 1 8 6 mph or 3 0 0 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
![graph TD A["Tire age"] --> B["Tire design"] B --> C["Tire size and tire make"] C --> D["Manufacturer's code for tire make"] D --> E["DOT xxxx xxx 0708"]](/content/2026/05/1019009/images/a4454b2ec8c37681c46e3aa67d75a0a9adc547703044989d02eca92edd2c7270.jpg)
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT ... 0708 means that the tire was manufactured in week 7 of 2008.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
RSC - Run-Flat Tires
You will recognize Run-Flat Tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to page 210.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than summer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tire tread depth should not be below 1/8 in/3 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface.
The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/3 mm, although, for example, European legislation only specifies a minimum tread depth of
1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of safety, new tires should be installed.
VIRGINA
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tire's circumference; the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has worn to a depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels, tires and suspension parts to be more susceptible to road hazard and consequential damages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for example, be caused by driving over curbs. The same applies to any other abnormal road behavior, such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In these cases, reduce speed immediately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest BMW center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there.
Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard to vehicle occupants and other road users.
Tire age
For various reasons, such as the development of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replacement after no more than 6 years, regardless of the actual wear of the tires.
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding:
DOT ... 0708 means that the tire was manufactured in week 7 of 2008.
Run-Flat Tires
The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-Flat Tires comprise a conditionally self-supporting tire and a special rim. The reinforcement in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can continue to be used subject to certain restrictions, even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 85.
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include potentially different tire casing structures and often wide variations in tire age, which can result in a limited service life.
Correct wheels and tires
When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.
BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufacturing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions, which could lead to body contact and thus to severe accidents. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot guarantee their driving safety.
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire combination at your BMW center.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is also necessary to ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or FTM.
To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single brand and tread configuration. After a tire has been damaged, mount the previous wheel and tire combination again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a puncture, refer to page 87. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.
Recommended tire brands
Certain makes of tire are recommended by BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall of the tire.
When properly used, these tires meet the highest standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold winter driving conditions. Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the winter tires mounted on your car; failure to do so could result in tire damage and accidents.
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the mounted tires must be displayed in your field of view. Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center can supply these labels.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.
Swapping wheels between axles
BMW advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles, even if all tires have the same size, as this could impair driving characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes, swapping wheels between the axles is not permissible.
Snow chains*
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and recommended. Consult your BMW center for more information. Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only. Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h with chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted, otherwise the ument might issue an incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, you may find it helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to page 82.
Under the hood
Do not work on the car unless you possess the necessary technical knowledge. If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guidelines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a BMW center or by a workshop that work according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.
Hood
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Opening
To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield before you open the engine compartment. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down, otherwise injuries may result. Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear, otherwise injuries may result.
If you see any signs while driving your vehicle that the hood is not completely closed, stop at once and close it securely.
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 216
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp cleaning system and window washer system, refer to page 64
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions.
Checking oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level monitor.
For a precise measurement and display of the oil level, it is necessary that the engine be at operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted driving for at least approx. 6.5 miles/10 km. You can have the oil level displayed while you are driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running.
3 Jump-starting connection, refer to page 230
4 Fluid filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding engine oil, page 215
Display in the instrument cluster
- Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol is shown in the display, accompanied by the word "OIL".
- Press button 2. The oil level is checked and the reading displayed.
Possible displays
1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.
3 Oil level down to minimum:
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil on page 215.
4 Oil level is too high.
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.
5 The oil level sensor is defective.
Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated distance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 217. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Display via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
- Press the MENBI
This opens the start menu.
- Press the controller to open the menu.
- Select "Info sources" and press the controller.
- Select "Service" and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.
- If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the controller until "Engine oil level" is selected and press the controller. The oil level is displayed.
To exit the display immediately: Select and press the controller.
Possible messages
"Engine oil level O.K."
"No measurement available: Updating engine oil level measurement..."
The engine oil level is measured. This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running, and about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.
"Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart of engine oil."
Add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil at the next opportunity, but no more than that, refer also to Adding engine oil below.
"Engine oil level too high"
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.
"Please observe recalculated service interval for engine oil"
Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated distance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 217. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a corresponding message is shown on the Control Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km, otherwise the engine could be damaged.
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the relevant warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may result.
Oil change
Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.
Specified engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical significance for the operation and service life of an engine. BMW continuously approves specific oils after confirming their suitability for use in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Do not use oil additives as these may cause engine damage.
Only use approved BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil.
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not available, you can add small quantities of other synthetic oils in between oil changes. Only use oils with the API SM specification or higher.
Your BMW center will be glad to answer any questions regarding BMW High Per-
formance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic oils.
You can also call BMW of North America at 1-800-831-1117 or visit the website www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Viscosity ratings
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and is categorized in SAE classes.
Selecting the appropriate SAE class depends on the regional climatic conditions in which you normally drive your BMW.
Approved oils belong to the 5W-40 and 5W-30 classes.
These oils can be used for driving at all outside temperatures.
BMW recommends
Castrol
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant cause burns.
Coolant consists of half water and half additive. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise engine damage may result. Because
additives are harmful to your health, it is important to follow the instructions on the containers.
Comply with the appropriate environmental protection regulations when dis-g of coolant additives.
Checking coolant level
- Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down.
- Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to open.
- The coolant level is correct if it is between the maximum and minimum marks in the filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to the filler neck.
- If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.
- Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
- Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW. The objective is to optimize efforts with respect to minimal vehicle maintenance costs.
If and when you come to sell your BMW, a comprehensive record of servicing will prove a significant benefit.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the different driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the remaining times or distances for selected maintenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates displayed, refer to page 72:
Engine oil
Brake pads: separately for front and rear
Brake fluid
▶ Vehicle check
Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores service-requirement information in the remote control while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advisor can read out this data from the remote control unit, and propose an optimized maintenance approach. Whenever you take your car in for servicing you should therefore hand your BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set correctly, refer to page 76; otherwise the effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not assured.
Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements.
BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service procedures are confirmed by entries in your vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the specified regular maintenance.
Socket for On-Board Diagnosis OBD
Primary components that make up exhaust emissions can be checked by a device via the OBD socket.
This socket is located on the driver's side to the left, on the bottom of the instrument panel underneath a cover.
Exhaust emission values
The warning lamp lights up:
The exhaust emission values have worsened. Have the car checked as
soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning lamp.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If this happens, you should reduce your speed and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly lead to serious damage of emissions-related components, especially the catalytic converter.
The warning lamp comes on if the gas cap is not properly tightened and the OBD system assumes that fuel vapor
is escaping. If the gas cap is then tightened, the warning lamp should go out within a few days.
Event data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or several measuring or diagnostic modules or a device for recording or sending certain vehicle data or information. In addition, if you have
signed a service contract for BMW Assist, certain vehicle data may be transmitted or recorded in order to facilitate the corresponding services.
Care
Care products
Regular cleaning and care contributes significantly to the value retention of your BMW.
BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your vehicle with products that are approved by BMW for this purpose.
Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on the products and services available for cleaning and caring for your BMW.
Original BMW CareProducts have been material tested, laboratory checked and in the field, and offer optimal care and action for your vehicle.
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol or solvents as these may result in dam-
Cleaning agents can contain substances that are dangerous or hazardous to your
health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety instructions on the packaging. When cleaning inside the vehicle, always open the doors or windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, provide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products designed for cleaning vehicles.
Exterior care
Washing the vehicle
Especially during the winter months, ensure that the vehicle is washed more
frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead to vehicle damage.
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them, otherwise
water can reduce braking efficiency over the short term and brake discs can corrode.
Automatic car washes
Preference should be given to cloth car washes.
Do not use high-pressure car washes, otherwise water may drip into the vehicle and the windows.
Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is suitable for your BMW. Check the following:
Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to page 237.
If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors, refer to page 52
▶ Maximum permissible tire width
In convertibles, do not treat the convertible top with wax. Ensure that a program is available that does not apply wax or is designed specifically for convertibles.
Preparations before driving into an automatic car wash:
▷ Unscrew rod antenna*
Deactivate the rain sensor* to avoid unintentional activation of the wipers.
Remove additional attachments, e.g. spoiler or telephone antennas, if there is a possibility that they could be damaged.
Automatic transmission
Before driving into an automatic car wash, perform the following steps to ensure that the vehicle can roll:
- Insert the remote control, even with convenient access, into the ignition lock.
- Engage transmission position N.
- Release the parking brake.
- Switch off the engine.
- Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.
Steam jets / high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, ensure that you maintain suffi-clearance to the vehicle and do not exceed temperature of 140 °F/60 °C.
Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or
temperature can lead to component damage or water penetration. Follow the operating instructions of the high-pressure washer.
When using high-pressure washers, do not spray against the sensors and cameras, e.g. of the Park Distance Control or Rear View Camera, for an extended period and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Manual car wash
When washing the vehicle by hand, use large quantities of water and car shampoo if necessary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or washing brush, applying light pressure only.
Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the rain sensor or switch off the ignition to prevent unintentional activation of the wipers.
Observe local regulations pertaining to washing vehicles by hand.
Headlamps
Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or corrosive cleaning agents.
Remove contamination, such as insects, by soaking with shampoo or insect remover and then rinsing with plenty of water.
Thaw ice with a windshield de-icer and do not use an ice scraper.
Windows
Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners containing quartz.
Wiper blades
Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to avoid streaking.
Wax and preservative residue and contamination on the window can lead to streaking when operating the windshield wipers, leading to premature wear of the wiper blades and causing the rain sensor to malfunction.
Convertible top care
The appearance and life of the convertible top depend on proper care and operation.
Follow these instructions:
Do not fold the convertible top into the convertible top box when the top is wet or frozen, as this may cause water spots, mold stains or chafed areas.
If water spots occur on the inside headliner despite precautions, remove them using a microfiber cloth and interior cleaner.
If the vehicle is parked in enclosed areas for extended periods, ensure that there is sufficient ventilation.
Remove bird droppings immediately, as their corrosive ingredients attack the convertible top and damage the rubber seals.
To remove stains from the convertible top, do not use stain removers, paint thinners, solvents, benzine or similar substances. These substances may damage the rubber parts. Improper care and cleaning may cause the convertible top and convertible top seams to become leaky.
To remove heavy soiling, use a special convertible top cleaner.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.
After washing the convertible top three to five times, treat it with an impregnating agent.
Paintwork care
Regular care contributes to value retention and protects the paintwork against the long-term effects of damaging substances.
Region-specific environmental influences can damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is important to adapt the frequency and scope of car care accordingly.
Immediately remove very aggressive substances, e.g. spilled fuel, oil, grease, tree resin or bird droppings, to prevent damage to the paintwork.
Repairing paintwork damage
Immediately repair scratches or similar damage, such as that caused by stones hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent rusting.
BMW recommends having paintwork damage repaired by a professional paint repair workshop according to BMW specifications using original BMW paint materials.
Preservation
A preservation treatment is necessary when water no longer beads off of the clean paintwork surface. Only use products for paintwork preservation that contain carnauba or synthetic waxes.
Rubber seals
Treat only with water or rubber care products.
Do not use silicon-containing care products on rubber seals, otherwise noise and ge could occur.
Chrome parts
Carefully clean vehicle parts, such as the radiator grill, door handles or window frames, with copious quantities of water and a shampoo additive. For additional treatment, use a chrome polish.
Light-alloy wheels
For technical reasons, dust is generated during braking that is deposited on the light-alloy wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acid-free rim cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly alkaline and abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets over 140 °F/60 °C, otherwise damage may occur.
Outside sensors / cameras
Keep the sensors and cameras on the outside of the vehicle, e.g. those of Park Distance Control, clean and free of ice to ensure that they remain fully functional.
Interior care
Upholstery / cloth trim
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to remove superficial dirt.
To treat severe stains, e.g. from beverages, use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth in combination with suitable interior cleaners. Follow the instructions on the packaging.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong ng.
Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are d.
Leather / leather trim
The leather used by BMW is a high quality natural product. Slight irregularities in the
leather are a typical characteristic of natural leather.
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the leather have an abrasive effect, leading to increased wear and causing the leather surface to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, frequently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
In particular, ensure that light-colored leather is cleaned regularly as it has a tendency to soil more easily.
Treat the leather twice a year using a leather lotion as dirt and grease will gradually attack the leather's protective layer.
Carpets / cargo bay
You can vacuum the carpets and floor mats or clean them with interior cleaner if heavily soiled.
The floor mats can be removed for cleaning. When replacing the mats, ensure that the seat rails do not extend over the floor mats, as this may damage the mats.
Lint on the floor mats occurs for technical reasons and can be removed by vacuuming repeatedly.
Interior plastic parts
▶ Imitation leather surfaces
Lamp glasses
▶ Display pane of instrument cluster
▷ Matt parts
Clean with water and solvent-free plastic cleaner if necessary.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Do not clean with cleaning agents as these may destroy the fabric.
Interior sensors / cameras
To clean interior sensors and cameras, e.g. of the High-Beam Assistant, use a lint-free cloth moistened with glass cleaner.
Displays
To clean the displays, e.g. of the radio or instrument cluster, use a display cleaning cloth or a soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.
Avoid applying excessive pressure when cleaning the displays, otherwise damage occur.
Do not use chemical or abrasive household cleaning agents. Keep all types of
fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces or electrical components may be corroded or damaged.
CD/DVD drives
Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may damage parts of the drive.
Vehicle storage
If your vehicle is to be decommissioned for longer than three months, your BMW center or a workshop that operates according to BMW specifications will be glad to advise you.
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
The onboard tool kit is stored below the floor mat in the cargo bay.
Wiper blades
- Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
- Press together the locking spring, arrows 1, and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
- Take the wiper blade out of the catch mechanism, pulling the blade toward the front.
To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield before you open the engine compartment.
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be handled carefully. BMW recommends having your BMW center perform any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your BMW center.
When working on electrical systems, always begin by switching off the consumer in question, otherwise short-circuits could result. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.
If the routine for changing a particular bulb is not described here, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.
Light-emitting diodes LED
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translucent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source for several hours, otherwise this could cause irritation to the retina.
Xenon lamps*
These bulbs have a very long service life and are highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails nevertheless, switch on the fog lamps and continue the journey with great care, provided that local legislation does not prohibit this.
Have any work on the xenon lamp system, including bulb replacements, performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, if such work is carried out improperly, the high voltage in the system presents the danger of fatal injuries.
Removing the headlamp cover
- Pull the wire brackets over the notches, see arrows, and fold to the side.
- Fold away the headlamp cover.
Be careful when attaching the headlamp cover and ensure that both wire brackets are securely in place, otherwise leaks could occur and cause damage to the headlamp system.
Attach the headlamp cover in reverse order.
Halogen headlamps
Halogen low beams and high beams
H7 bulb, 55 watts
Always wear gloves and eye protection; the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is pressurized. Otherwise there is a risk of injury if the bulb is damaged.
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
1 High beams
2 Low-beam headlamps
- Remove the headlamp cover.
- Fold down the holding bracket.
-
Remove and replace the bulb.
-
Reattach the bulb holder with the notch at the top.
- Fold the holding bracket back up and let it snap into place.
- Attach the headlamp cover.
Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps
W5W bulb, 5 watts
- Remove the headlamp cover.
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
- Pull out the bulb holder.
- Remove and replace the bulb.
- Reinsert the bulb holder.
- Attach the headlamp cover.
Xenon headlamps
Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps, daytime running lamps
H8 bulb, 35 watts
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
- Remove the headlamp cover.
- Turn the bulb, see arrow, and remove it.
-
Pull off the connector and replace the bulb.
-
Attach the connector, insert the bulb and turn it all the way in the opposite direction.
- Attach the headlamp cover.
Corner-illuminating lamps
H3 bulb, 55 watts
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
- Remove the top headlamp cover, using the screwdriver to push the detents to one side.
- Turn the bulb holder, see arrow, and remove it.
- Slide the bulb out of the holder and pull off the connector.
- Replace the bulb and attach the connector.
- Insert the bulb holder and turn it all the way in the opposite direction.
- Attach the headlamp cover.
Turn signals, front
PY21W Silver Vision bulb, 21 watts
The turn signal bulb can be changed via a cover in the wheel arch.
- Turn the respective wheel inwards.
- Using a coin, turn both locks of the cover all the way to the left, arrows 1, and remove the cover.
- Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove it, arrow 2.
- Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the right for removal and replacement.
- Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning it to the right.
- Attach the cover by positioning the bottom edge first and then turning both locks all the way to the right.
Tail lamps
Turn signal: PY21W bulb, 21 watts
Backup lamp: W16W bulb, 16 watts
Brake lamps: P21W bulb, 21 watts
Brake Force Display lamp: H21W bulb, 21 watts
1 Inner brake lamp
2 Outer brake lamp
3 Lateral reflector
4 Roadside parking lamp and tail lamp LED
5 Reflector
6 Turn signal
7 Backup lamp
8 Brake Force Display lamp
Replacing tail lamps
Outer brake lamp
The outer brake lamp can be accessed through a single socket.
The figure shows the right side of the vehicle.
- Remove the cover from the panel of the cargo bay.
- Turn the bulb holder to the left, see arrow, and remove it.
- Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
- Attach the bulb holder and turn it all the way in the opposite direction.
- Reattach the cover.
The roadside parking lamp/tail lamp uses LED design. After replacing the bulb, ensure that the bulb holder is properly seated, otherwise the roadside parking lamp/tail lamp may not work.
Inner brake lamp, turn signal, backup lamp and Brake Force Display lamp
The bulbs are integrated in a single bulb holder.
- Remove the cover from the panel of the cargo bay.
- Detach the bulb holder by pressing together the clips, see arrows, and remove it.
- Brake lamps and turn signal: apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
- Backup lamp: pull the bulb out of the socket and replace it.
- Attach the bulb holder and let it snap into place.
- Reattach the cover.
License plate lamps and center brake lamp
These lamps use LED technology for operation. In the event of a malfunction, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with Run-Flat Tires as standard. This removes the need to change a wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.
For information on continuing to drive with a damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 85.
The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to Run-Flat Tires, page 210.
When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer also to New wheels and tires, page 210.
The tools for changing wheels are available as optional accessories from your
BMW center.
Jack mounting points
The jacking points are at the positions shown in the illustration.
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate climate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.
Charging the battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting on page 230.
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of by your BMW center or hand them in to a recycling center. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Always secure the battery against tipping over during transport.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of some equipment may be limited and require reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise have been lost and will have to be programmed:
Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to page 75.
Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be stored again, refer to page 156.
Navigation system
Wait for the system to start, refer to page 146.
Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be raised. The system must be initialized.
Please contact your BMW center.
Seat and mirror memory* The positions must be stored again, refer to page 49.
Inside rearview mirror with digital compass The system must be calibrated, refer to page 106.
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating, otherwise this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.
In the glove compartment
Accessing the fuse box:
- Open the glove compartment.
- Remove the damper, arrow 1, from the lower holder by applying forward pressure.
- Disengage the glove compartment by pressing on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold it down.
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic forceps are set in holders on the distributor box.
Information on fuse assignment can be found next to the distributor box.
After replacing a fuse, press the glove compartment upward until it engages and reattach the damper.
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency Request*
Conditions for an Emergency Request:
Full preparation package mobile phone: this equipment makes it possible to send an Emergency Request even if no mobile phone is paired with the vehicle.
BMW Assist is activated. Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 196.
Radio readiness is on.
The BMW Assist system is logged on to a mobile phone network.
The Emergency Request system is operable.
Once your service contract for BMW Assist expires, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by a BMW center without you having to visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, Emergency Requests are not possible. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed.
Sending an Emergency Request
- Briefly press the cover flap to open.
- Press the SOS button for at least 2 seconds.
The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the voice connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established, the LED flashes.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center has received your Emergency Request, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you
and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist Response Center will be able to initiate further steps to assist you under certain conditions.
If the circumstances allow this, remain in the vehicle until the connection has been established. You will then be able to provide a detailed description of the situation.
If the current location of your vehicle can be determined, it will be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may still be heard by the BMW Assist Response Center, however.
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Request is sent automatically immediately after a severe accident. This Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by the button being pressed.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request service cannot be guaranteed
for the most unfavorable conditions.
Roadside Assistance
The BMW Roadside Assistance is there to assist you around the clock in the event of a breakdown, including on weekends and public holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assistance in your home country can be found in the Contact brochure.
In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist, you can establish contact with BMW Roadside Assistance for breakdown assistance directly via iDrive, refer to page 192.
First aid pouch*
Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Therefore, check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any items in good time, if necessary.
The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand side of the cargo bay in a storage area.
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located in a holder in the luggage compartment lid. Press the tabs to take it out.
Jump starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's engine can be started by connecting two jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-may occur. Carefully adhere to the following sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.
Preparation
- Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the battery.
- Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
- Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise is a danger of shorting.
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct order to prevent sparking at the battery, n could cause injury.
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in the engine compartment which acts as the battery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine compartment overview on page 213. The cap is marked with +.
- Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting connection up to remove.
-
Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
-
Attach the second terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
-
Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative pole.
- Attach the second terminal clamp of the minus/– jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
- Start the engine of the donor vehicle and allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly increased idle speed.
- Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way. If the first start attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.
- Let the engines run for a few minutes.
- Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
Tow-starting, towing away
Observe the applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing vehi-
cles.
Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being d.
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.
It is stored with the onboard tool kit underneath the floor mat in the cargo bay, refer to page 223.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoiding loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise the towing and the vehicle could be damaged.
Access to screw thread
Rectangular cover panel in bumper: Press the arrow on the cover.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 58, otherwise the low-beam
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and
windshield wipers may be unavailable. Power steering assistance is not available when the engine is not running. Thus, braking and steering will require increased effort. Active steering is not active and it will be necessary to turn the steering wheel further.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic transmission
Selector lever in position N.
Changing the selector lever position, refer to page 61.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic transmission may be damaged.
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or body and chassis parts, otherwise damnay result.
With a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may possible to maintain control.
The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please observe the following:
Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.
The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle result in damage.
With a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when g, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage.
With a tow truck
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
Tow-starting
Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possible; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to page 230. Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission cannot be tow-started at all.
- Switch on the hazard warning flashers, comply with local regulations.
- Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58.
- Shift into 3rd gear.
- Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch depressed all the way and slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately depress the clutch completely again.
- Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning flashers.
- Have the vehicle checked.
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short commands for the voice command system and an index that will help you find information most quickly.
Technical data
Engine data
| 128i 135i | |
| Displacement cu in/cm 3 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979 | |
| Number of cylinders 6 6 | |
| Maximum power output hp 230 300at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800 | |
| Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,400 - 5,000 | |
Dimensions
Coupe
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 35 ft 1 in/10.7 m.
Convertible
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 35 ft 1 in/10.7 m.
Weights
Coupe
128i 135i
Curb weight
▶ with manual transmission lbs/kg 3,252/1,475 3,373/1,530
▶ with automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,329/1,510 3,384/1,535
Approved gross weight
▶ with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,134/1,875 4,255/1,930
with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,211/1,910 4,266/1,935
| Load lbs/kg 882/400 | 882/400 | ||
| Approved front axle load | lbs/kg | 2,028/920 | 2,116/960 |
| Approved rear axle load | lbs/kg 2,249/1,020 | 2,249/1,020 | |
| Approved roof load capacity | lbs/kg | 165/75 | 165/75 |
| Cargo bay capacity | cu ft/liters | 13.1/370 | 13.1/370 |
Convertible
| 128i | 135i | ||
| Curb weight | |||
| ▷ with manual transmission | lbs/kg | 3,494/1,585 | 3,660/1660 |
| ▷ with automatic transmission | lbs/kg | 3,571/1,620 | 3,671/1,665 |
| Approved gross weight | |||
| ▷ with manual transmission | lbs/kg | 4,398/1,995 | 4,564/2,070 |
| ▷ with automatic transmission | lbs/kg | 4,475/2,030 | 4,575/2,075 |
| Load | lbs/kg | 904/410 | 904/410 |
| Approved front axle load | lbs/kg | 2,050/930 | 2,149/975 |
| Approved rear axle load | lbs/kg | 2,447/1,110 | 2,447/1,110 |
| Approved roof load capacity | lbs/kg | - | - |
| Cargo bay capacity | cu ft/liters | 9.1 - 10.7/260 - 305 | 9.1 - 10.7/260 - 305 |
Capacities
| Notes | |||
| Fuel tank: | US gal/liters | approx. 14.0/53 | Fuel grade: page 203 |
| including reserve of | US gal/liters | approx. 2.1/8.0 | |
| Window washer system | For more details: page 64 | ||
| including headlamp washers | US qt/liters | approx. 6.3/6.0 | |
Short commands for the voice command system*
With short commands you can carry out certain functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short commands for the voice command system.
Communication
| Function Command | |
| To open phone 183 >Phone< | |
| To dial phone number 183 | >Dial number< |
| To display phone book 183 | >A to Z< |
| To select from phone book 183 | >Call ...< or >Dial name< |
| To display "Top 8" 183 | >Top 8< |
| To redial 183 >Redial< | |
| To display "Received calls" 183 | >Received calls< |
| To display "Missed calls" 183 | >Missed calls< |
| To display "Bluetooth" 177 | >Bluetooth< |
| To open "BMW Service" services 192 | >BMW Service< |
Navigation
| Function Command | |
| To open navigation 129 | >Navigation< |
| To display current position 144 | >Current position< |
| To open "Enter address" 123 | >Enter address< |
| To open "New destination" 123 | >New destination< |
| To display "Input map" 128 | >Input map< |
| To open "Information" 129 | >Info menu< |
| To display address book 131 | >Address book< or >From address book< |
| To display destination list 130 | >Destination list< |
| To switch on destination guidance 136 | >Start guidance< |
| To switch off destination guidance 136 | >Stop guidance< |
| To display route criteria 134 | >Route preference< |
| To switch on voice instructions 140 | >Navigation info on< |
| To switch off voice instructions 140 | >Navigation info off< |
| To repeat voice instructions 140 | >Repeat navigation info< |
| To show arrow display 137 | >Arrow display< |
| To display map 138 | >Map<, >Map facing north<, >Map direction of travel< or >Perspective< |
| To open route 125, 141 | >Route menu< |
| To open "New route" 141 | >New route< |
| To change scale 139 | >Scale ... miles< or >Scale ... feet< |
| To display towns/cities and streets along the route 139 | >Route list< |
Onboard info
| Function Command | ||
| To open "Car Data" | 69 | >Car Data< |
| To display computer | 68 | >Onboard info< |
| To display trip computer | 70 | >Trip computer< |
| To open speed limit | 79 | >Limit< |
| To open stopwatch | 79 | >Stopwatch< |
| To activate road-speed limit | 79 | >Limit on< |
| To deactivate road-speed limit | 79 | >Limit off< |
Entertainment
| Function Command | |
| Tone control 151 | >Audio< |
| To switch on radio 154 | >Radio on<, >FM< or >AM< |
| To open "FM" 154 | >FM menu< |
| To open "AM" 154 | >AM menu< |
| To open "All stations" 154 | >FM All stations< |
| To select radio station 154 | >Station< e.g. >Station WNYC< or >Choose station< |
| To open "Presets" 154 | >FM presets< or >AM presets< |
| To open "Manual" 155 | >FM manual< or >AM manual< or >Choose frequency<, >Frequency ... Megahertz< |
| Function | Command |
| To select preset radio station 156 | >Preset ...<e.g. >Preset 1< |
| To open strongest radio stations 155 | >AM Autostore< |
| To open "SAT" 161 | >SAT radio menu< |
| To switch on satellite radio 161 | >SAT radio< |
| To open "Presets" of the satellite radio 162 | >SAT radio presets< |
| To open "All channels" of the satellite radio 161 | >SAT radio all channels< |
| To open "Categories" of the satellite radio 161 | >SAT radio categories< |
| To open CD player 163 | >CD menu< |
| To switch on CD player 163 | >CD< |
| To open CD changer 163 | >CD changer menu< |
| To switch on CD changer 163 | >CD changer< |
| To select a CD in the CD changer 163 | >CD 1...6< |
| To select track 164 | >CD track ...< |
| To select a CD and track in the CD changer 164 | >CD 1...6 track ...< |
| To select track 164 | >Track ...< |
| To start sound output for external audio device 169 | >Audio Aux on< |
Climate
| Function | Command |
| To open "Vent settings" 98 | >Vent settings< |
| To open "Automatic programs" 99 | >Automatic programs< |
imenu
| Function | Command |
| To open the i menu | >Settings menu< |
| To open "Info sources" | >Info sources< |
| To open "Settings" | >Settings< |
| To open "Door locks" 29, 32 | >Door locks< |
| To open "Steering wheel buttons" 53 | >Steering wheel buttons< |
| To open "Lighting" 63, 93 | >Lighting< |
| To open "BMW Service" 192 | >BMW Service< |
| To open "Service requirements" 73 | >Service requirements< |
| To open "Service" 72 | >Service< |
| To display "Check Control messages" 78 | >Check Control messages< |
| To set brightness of Control Display 80 | >Brightness< |
| Function Command | ||
| To open "Units" | 71 | >Units< |
| To open "Language" | 80, 140 | >Languages< |
| To open "Time" | 75 | >Time< |
| To open "Date" | 76 | >Date< |
| To open "PDC" | 81 | >PDC< |
| To open "FTM" | 84 | >FTM< |
Everything from A-Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions and refers you to the page where these texts can be found.
A
ABS Antilock Brake System 82
Accessories, refer to The individual vehicle 5
Accident, reporting, refer to Emergency Request 229
Activated-charcoal filter 101
"Activation time" for parked car ventilation 101
Active steering 88
Adaptive Head Light 94
"Add digits" on the mobile phone 184
Additives
- coolant 216
- engine oil 215
"Address book" in navigation 131
Address for navigation
– deleting 133
- entering 123, 131
-selecting 132
- storing 131
– storing current position 132
"Add to destination list" 126
Airbags 89
- sitting safely 45
- warning lamp 90
Air conditioner 97
Air distribution
- automatic 99
Air flow rate 99
Airing, refer to Ventilation 100
Air outlets, refer to Air vents 97
Air pressure, checking, refer to Tire inflation pressure 204
Air recirculation, refer to Recirculated-air mode 99
"Air recirculation on / off" 53
Air vents 97
AKI, refer to Fuel specifications 202
Alarm system 34
- avoiding unintentional alarms 35
- interior motion sensor 35
- switching off an alarm 35
- tilt alarm sensor 35
"All channels" for satellite radio 161
All-season tires, refer to Winter tires 211
"All stations", displaying with the radio 154
"AM", waveband 150, 154
Ambient air, refer to Recirculated-air mode 99
Antenna for mobile phone 176
Antifreeze
- coolant 216
- washer fluid 64
Antilock Brake System ABS 82
Anti-theft alarm system, refer to Alarm system 34
Anti-theft system 29
Approved axle loads, refer to Weights 239
Approved gross vehicle weight, refer to Weights 239
Armrest, refer to Center armrest 107
Arrival time
- computer 69
Arrival time, refer to Starting destination guidance 136
Arrow display for navigation 137
"Arrow display" in navigation 137
Ashtray 107
Assist 191
Assistance systems, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82
"Assist profile" 197
AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 99
"Audio" 153, 157
Audio 150
- controls 150
- switching on/off 150
-tone control 151
- volume 151
"Audio", refer to Tone control 151
Automatic
– air distribution 99
– air flow rate 99
– BMW Teleservice Call 193
-cruise control 65
- headlamp control 92
– storing of stations 155
Automatic car wash, refer to Car wash 116
Automatic car washes 219
Automatic climate control 97
- automatic air distribution 99
- settings via iDrive 98
Automatic curb monitor 52
Automatic lamps
– refer to Welcome lamps 92
"Automatic programs" with automatic climate control 99
Automatic recirculated-air control AUC 99
Automatic station search 155
Automatic transmission with Steptronic 60
- interlock 61
- selector lever lock 61
- shiftlock 61
- towing 231
-tow-starting 231
"Automatic ventilation" for parked car ventilation 101
AUTO program for automatic climate control 99
"Auto Request" 193
"Autostore"
-on the radio 156
"AUX" 150, 169, 171
- AUX-In port 169
- USB-audio interface 170
AUX-In port 169
Average fuel consumption 69
- setting the units 71
Average speed 69
"Avoid ferries" in navigation 134
"Avoid highways" in navigation 134
Avoid highways in navigation 134
Avoiding unintentional alarms 35
"Avoid tollroads" in navigation 134
Axle loads, refer to Weights 239
"A - Z" 183, 184
B
Backrests, refer to Seats 46
Backrest width adjustment 47
Back seats, refer to Rear seats – adjusting head restraints 48
Backup lamp, replacing bulb 226
Bag for skis, refer to Ski bag 109
Balance, tone control 151
Band-aids, refer to First-aid pouch 230
Bar, refer to Tow-starting, towing away 232
Bass, tone control 151
Bass sounds, refer to Treble and bass 151
Battery 227
- charging 227
- disposal 37, 227
-jump starting 230
- temporary power failure 227
Battery renewal
- remote control for vehicle 37
Being towed 231
Belts, refer to Safety belts 51
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety belts 51
Beverage holders, refer to Cup holders 107
Blower, refer to Air flow rate 99
BMW
-car shampoo 222
"BMW
Assist" 192, 193, 194, 195
BMW Assist
-activating 196
- contacting BMW Customer Relations 194
– Roadside Assistance 192
- services offered 191
- TeleServices 193
"BMW Contact" 186
"BMW Contact Numbers" 186
BMW Maintenance System 217
"BMW Service settings" 197
BMW Teleservice Call
- automatic 193
- manual 193
BMW TeleServices 193
- displaying 194
-updating 194
Bottle holders, refer to Cup holders 107
Brake assist, refer to Dynamic Brake Control 82
Brake fluid
– service requirements 72
Brake Force Display 88
Brake lamps
- Brake Force Display 88
-replacing bulb 226
Brake pads, breaking in 114
Brake rotors 116
- brakes 114
- breaking in 114
Brakes
- ABS 82
– BMW Maintenance System 217
- braking safely 116
- breaking in 114
- parking brake 59
– service requirements 72
Brake system 114
– BMW Maintenance System 217
- breaking in 114
- disc brakes 116
Breakdown services, refer to Roadside Assistance 229
Breaking in the clutch 114
Break-in period 114
"Brightness" 80
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps and bulbs 223
Bulbs, changing 223
Button for starting the engine 58
Buttons on the steering wheel 11
C
California Proposition 65 warning 6
"Call" 184, 195
Call
-accepting 182
– displaying accepted 184
-ending 183
- missed 184
-starting 183
Calling
– from phone book 183
- from Top 8 list 184
- redialing 184
Can holders, refer to Cup holders 107
Capacities 239
Capacity of the cargo bay 239
Car battery, refer to Vehicle battery 227
Car care, refer to Care 219
"Car Data" 69
Care 219
- automatic car washes 219
-care products 219
- carpets 221
- CD/DVD drives 222
-chrome parts 221
-convertible top 220
– displays 222
- exterior 219
– fine wood parts 222
- headlamps 220
– high-pressure washer 219
- interior 221
- leather 221
– light-alloy wheels 221
- paintwork 220
- plastic parts 222
- rubber seals 221
- safety belts 222
- sensors and cameras 222
- upholstery and cloth trim 221
- washing the car manually 220
-windows 220
- wiper blades 220
Cargo, securing 118
Cargo bay
-capacity 239
- convenient access 37
- enlarging, refer to Through-loading system 108
– lamp, refer to Interior lamps 95
– lid, refer to Luggage compartment lid 33
- opening from outside 33
Cargo bay lid, refer to Luggage compartment lid 33
Cargo bay net, refer to Securing cargo 118
Cargo loading
-securing cargo 118
-stowing cargo 117
- vehicle 117
Car jack
-jacking points 227
Car key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 28
Car phone 176
- installation location, refer to Center armrest 107
– refer to Mobile phone 176
– refer to separate Owner's Manual
Car radio, refer to Radio 154
Car shampoo 222
Car wash 116
Catalytic converter, refer to Hot exhaust system 115
"Categories" for satellite radio 161
"CD" 150, 163
CD changer 163
- compressed audio files 163
- controls 150
– fast forward/reverse 167
- installation location 167
- playing a track 165
- random order 166
– repeating a track 166
-selecting a CD 163
-selecting a track 164
- switching on/off 150
-tone control 151
- volume 151
CD player 163
- compressed audio files 163
- controls 150
– fast forward/reverse 167
- playing a track 165
- random order 166
– repeating a track 166
-selecting a track 164
– switching on/off 150
-tone control 151
- volume 151
Center armrest 107
Center brake lamp, replacing bulb 226
Center console, refer to Around the center console 14
Central key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 28
"Central locking" 30, 50
Central locking
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
Central locking system 29
- convenient access 36
Changes, technical, refer to For your own safety 5
Changing the language on the Control Display 80
Changing wheels 226
Chassis number, refer to Engine compartment 213
Check Control 77
"Check Control messages" 78
Checking oil level 213
Child-restraint fixing system LATCH 56
Child-restraint systems 55
Child seats 55
Chrome parts 222
Chrome polish 222
Cigarette lighter 108
Cleaning headlamps 64
- washer fluid 64
Cleaning your BMW, refer to Care 219
"Climate" 98
Clock 67
- 12h/24h format 76
- setting time 75
Closing
- from inside 32
- from outside 29
Clothes hooks 107
Cold start, refer to Starting the engine 59
Combination instrument, refer to Instrument cluster 12
Comfort access, refer to Convenient access 36
Comfort area, refer to Around the center console 14
"Communication" 182, 192, 193, 194, 195
Compact disc, refer to
- CD changer 163
- CD player 163
Compartment for remote control, refer to Ignition lock 58
Compass 105
Computer 68
– displays on Control Display 69
-hour signal 76
Computer, refer to iDrive 16
"Concert hall" for Tone control 152
"Concierge" 195
Concierge service 195
Condensation, refer to When the vehicle is parked 116
Condition Based Service CBS 217
Configuring settings, refer to Personal Profile 28
Confirmation signals for locking/unlocking the vehicle 31
Connecting vacuum cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 108
Consumption, refer to Average fuel consumption 69
"Continue guidance to destination?" 137
Control Center, refer to iDrive 16
Control Display 16
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls and displays 10
Convenient access 36
-replacing the battery 37
Convenient operation
- windows 30
- windows with convenient access 36
– with convenient access 36
Convenient starting, refer to Starting the engine 59
Convertible
- rollover protection system 90
- top 40
- wind deflector 44
Convertible top
- convenient opening 30
Convertible top care 220
Coolant 216
-checking level 216
- filling 216
Coolant temperature 68
Cooling, maximum 98
Cooling fluid, refer to Coolant 216
Copyright 2
Corner-illuminating lamps 94
Corner-illuminating lamps, refer to Adaptive Head Light 94
Cornering lamps, refer to Adaptive Head Light 94
Courtesy lamps 95
Cross-hairs in navigation 128
Cruise control 65
Cruising range 69
Cup holders 107
Curb weight, refer to Weights 239
Current fuel consumption 69
"Current position" 144
Current position
- displaying 144
- entering 132
-storing 132
"Customer Relations" 186, 194
D
Dashboard, refer to Cockpit 10
Dashboard lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 95
Data
-dimensions237
- sizes 237
Data, technical 236
-capacities 239
- engine 236
- weights 239
"Date" 76
Date
- setting 76
- setting format 77
"Date format" 77
"Daytime running lamps" 94
Daytime running lamps, switch positions 93
DBC Dynamic Brake Control 82
"Deactivated" 51
Deactivating front passenger airbags 89
Deadlocking, refer to Locking 30
Decommissioning the vehicle, refer to Caring for your vehicle
Defect
- door lock 32
– luggage compartment lid 33
Defogging windows 100
Defrosting the windows 100
Defrosting windshield, refer to Defrosting windows 100
Defrost position, refer to Defrosting windows 100
"Delete address book" in navigation 133
"Delete all numbers" on the mobile phone 185
"Delete data" in navigation 133
"Delete" for mobile phone 185
Destination address
- deleting 133
- entering 123, 127
Destination for navigation
- destination list 130
- entry 123
- home address 133
– manual entry 123, 127
– selecting from address book 132
– selecting using information 129
-selecting via language 127
– selecting via map 128
- storing 131
Destination guidance 136
– canceling voice instructions 54
- changing specified route 134
– displaying route 137
– distance and arrival 136
-starting 136
- terminating/continuing 136
- voice instructions 140
– volume of voice instructions 140
Destination list for navigation system 130
Destinations recently driven to 130
"Details" for audio mode 171
"Dial" for mobile phone 183
"Dial number" 183
Differential, breaking in 114
Digital clock 67
Digital compass 105
Digital radio, refer to High Definition Radio 157
Digital Versatile Disc, refer to
- Drive for navigation DVD 150
Dimensions 237
Directional indicators, refer to Turn signals 62
Direction instructions, refer to Voice instructions 140
Directory for navigation, refer to Address book 131
Displacement, refer to Engine data 236
"Display" 20
Display, refer to Control Display 16
Display lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 95
Displays, refer to Instrument cluster 12
Displays and controls 10
"Display settings" 80
Disposal
- of coolant 216
- remote control battery 37
- vehicle battery 227
Distance, refer to Computer 69
Distance remaining to service, refer to Service requirements 72
"Distance to dest." 70
Distance to destination, refer to Computer 69
Distance warning, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 81
Door key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 28
Door lock 32
Door lock, confirmation signals 31
"Door locks" 30, 32, 73
Doors, emergency operation 32
DOT Quality Grades 208
Draft-free ventilation 100
Drinks holders, refer to Cup holders 107
Drive for navigation DVD 150
Drive-off assistance, refer to DSC 82
Drive-off assistant 83
Driving around a traffic congestion 144
Driving lamps, refer to Parking lamps/low beams 92
Driving notes 114
Driving off on hills, refer to Drive-off assistant 83
Driving route, refer to Displaying route 137
Driving stability control systems 82
Driving through water 116
Driving tips, refer to Driving notes 114
Dry air, refer to Cooling function 100
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 82
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 83
-indicator lamps 83
DVD
– drive for navigation DVD 150
DVD for navigation 122
Dynamic Brake Control DBC 82
"Dynamic route" in navigation 134
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82
Dynamic Traction Control DTC
-indicator lamps 83
E
EBV Electronic brake-force distribution 82
Eject button, refer to Buttons on the CD player 150
Electrical malfunction
- door lock 32
– luggage compartment lid 33
Electronic brake-force distribution EBV 82
Electronic oil level check 213
Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82
Emergency operation, refer to Manual operation
- door lock 32
– transmission lock, automatic transmission 62
Emergency release, luggage compartment lid 34
Emergency Request 229
Emergency services, refer to Roadside Assistance 229
"Enabled services" 196
"Enabled TeleServices" 194
"End call" 183
Energy, saving
– saving fuel 114
Engine
- breaking in 114
-data 236
-speed 236
-starting 59
- starting, convenient access 36
-switching off 59
Engine compartment 213
Engine coolant, refer to Coolant 216
Engine oil
- adding 215
- additives 215
– BMW Maintenance System 217
-checking level 213
- intervals between changes, refer to Service requirements 72
– specified engine oils 215
"Engine oil level" 214
Engine output, refer to Engine data 236
Engine speed, refer to Engine data 236
Engine starting, refer to Starting the engine 59
"Enter address" 124
Entering a destination 124
Entering a destination country 124
Entering a house number or intersection 126
Entering an intersection 125
Entering a street 125
"Entertainment" 150
"Equalizer", refer to Tone control 152
Equalizer, refer to Tone control 152
"ESN" 160
ESP Electronic Stability Program, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82
Event data recorders 218
Exhaust system, refer to Hot exhaust system 115
Exterior mirrors 51
- adjusting 51
- automatic dimming feature 53
- automatic heating 52
- folding in and out 52
External audio device, refer to AUX-In port 169
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing away 231
- for tying down loads 118
F
Fader, tone control 151
Failure messages, refer to Check Control 77
Failure of an electrical consumer 227
False alarm, refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms 35
Fastening safety belts, refer to Safety belts 51
Fastest route for navigation 134
Fast forward
- CD changer 167
- CD player 167
"Fast route" in navigation 134
Filter of automatic climate control, refer to Microfilter/activated charcoal filter 101
First aid pouch 230
Fixture for remote control, refer to Ignition lock 58
Flash when locking/unlocking 31
Flat tire
- Run-Flat Tires 210
– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84
-indicating a flat tire 85
- initializing the system 84
-malfunction 85
- system limits 84
Flat tires, refer to Tire condition 209
"FM", waveband 150, 154
FM, waveband 154
Fog lamps 95
-indicator lamp 13,95
Footbrake, refer to Braking safely 116
Footwell lamps 95
For your own safety 5
Frequency, selecting manually 155
Front airbags 89
Front seat setting 45
Frost, removing from windows, refer to Defrosting windows 100
FTM, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84
Fuel 202
-gauge 68
– high-quality brands 202
- quality 202
– specifications 202
- tank contents, refer to Capacities 239
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel gauge 68
Fuel consumption display, refer to Average fuel consumption 69
Fuel consumption statistics, refer to Average fuel consumption 69
Fuel display, refer to Fuel gauge 68
– releasing in the event of electrical malfunction 202
Fuses 227
G
Garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 103
Gasoline, refer to Required fuel 202
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel gauge 68
Gear change
– with automatic transmission 61
– with manual transmission 60
Gear display, with automatic transmission 60
Gearshift lever
– automatic transmission with Steptronic 61
– manual transmission 60
General driving notes 115
Glass roof, electric 39
– closing after electrical malfunction 40
- convenient operation 32
- opening, closing 39
– operation with convenient access 36
- pinch protection system 40
- raising 39
- remote control 30
Glove compartment 106
GPS navigation, refer to Navigation system 122
Grills, refer to Air vents 97
Gross vehicle weight, refer to Weights 239
H
Halogen lamps
- replacing bulbs 224
Handbrake, refer to Parking brake 59
Hands-free system, refer to Microphone for hands-free mode 14
Hazard warning flashers 14
"HD radio" 157
HD radio, refer to High Definition Radio 157
Head airbags 89
Headlamp control, automatic 92
Headlamp cover 224
Headlamp flasher 62
-indicator lamp 13
Headlamps
-replacing bulbs 224
Head restraints 47
Heated
-seats 49
Heated mirrors 52
Heating
-mirrors 52
-seats49
Heating, rear window 100
Heating and ventilation 97
Heating during a stop 100
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing cargo 117
Height, refer to Dimensions 237
Height adjustment
- steering wheel 53
High beams 94
-indicator lamp 13
- replacing bulbs 224
High Definition Radio 157
High-pressure washer 219, 220
High water, refer to Driving through water 116
Highways, refer to Route criteria 134
Hills 116
Holders for cups 107
Home address 133
"Home address" in navigation 134
Hood 212
Hot exhaust system 115
"Hour memo" 76
"House number" in destination entry 126
Hydraulic brake assist, refer to Dynamic Brake Control 82
Hydroplaning 115
I
IBOC, refer to High Definition Radio 157
Ice warning, refer to Outside temperature warning 67
ID3 tag, refer to Information about the track 165
Identification marks
-tire coding 208
iDrive 16
- adjusting brightness 80
- automatic climate control 98
– changing date and time 75
- changing language 80
– confirming selection or entry 19
– displays, menus 17
- lists 19
– menu guidance 17
– operating principle 16
-selecting a menu item 19
- status information 20
– switching menu pages 19
- symbols 18
Ignition 58
- switched off 58
– switched on 58
Ignition key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 28
Ignition key position 1, refer to Radio readiness 58
Ignition key position 2, refer to Ignition on 58
Ignition lock 58
Imprint 2
Indicator and warning lamps 13
- Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 87
Indicator lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 95
Individually programmable buttons on steering wheel 53
Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 28
Inflation pressure, tires 204
Inflation pressure monitoring, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85
Information
-on another location 129
-oncountry129
-on current position 129
-ondestinationlocation129
"Information on destination" 131
"Info sources" 73
Initializing
- compass, refer to Calibrating 106
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84
"Input map" 128
Installation location
- CD changer 167
Instructions for navigation system, refer to Voice instructions 140
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 95
Integrated key 28
Integrated universal remote control 103
Interesting destination for navigation 129
"Interim time" 79
Interior lamps 95
- remote control 30
Interior motion sensor 35
Interior rearview mirror 52
- automatic dimming feature 53
- compass 105
Interlock 61
Intermittent mode of the wipers 63
J
Jacking points 227
Jets, refer to Air vents 97
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jumpering, refer to Jump starting 230
Jump starting 230
K
Key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 28
Keyless go, refer to Convenient access 36
Keyless opening and closing, refer to Convenient access 36
Key Memory, refer to Personal Profile 28
Kick-down 61
Knock control 202
L
Lamps
- Adaptive Head Light 94
- instrument lighting 95
- interior lighting 95
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/low beams 92
Lamps and bulbs, replacing bulbs 223
"Language / Units" 71, 80
"Language / Units" in navigation 138, 140
"Languages" 80
"Languages" in navigation 138, 140
Lashing eyes, refer to Securing cargo 118
Last destinations, refer to Destination list 130
"Last seat pos." 50
LATCH child-restraint fixing system 56
Leather care 221
LED Light-emitting diodes 223
Length, refer to Dimensions 237
License plate lamp, replacing bulb 226
Light-alloy wheels 221
Light-emitting diodes LED 223
Lighter 108
- socket 108
"Lighting" 63, 93
Lighting
-lamps and bulbs 223
- of instruments 95
– of vehicle, refer to Lamps 92
Light switch 92
"Limit", refer to Speed limit 79
Limit, refer to Speed limit 79
Load securing equipment, refer to Securing cargo 118
Lock buttons of doors, refer to Locking 33
Locking
- adjusting confirmation signal 31
- from inside 33
- from outside 30
– without remote control, refer to Convenient access 36
Locking and unlocking doors
- from inside 32
– from outside 29
Low-beam headlamps 92
- automatic 92
-replacing bulbs 224
Lower back support, refer to Lumbar support 47
Luggage compartment, refer to Cargo bay
Luggage compartment lid 33
- convenient access 37
- emergency release 34
- opening from outside 33
- unlocking manually 33
- unlocking with remote control 30
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-mounted luggage rack 118
Lumbar support 47
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter tires 211
Maintenance, refer to
- BMW Maintenance System 217
- Service booklet
Maintenance system 217
Malfunction warnings, refer to Check Control 77
Manual
– BMW Teleservice Call 193
Manual car wash 220
"Manual" on the radio 155
Manual operation
- door lock 32
- luggage compartment lid 33
– transmission lock, automatic transmission 62
Manual operation with automatic transmission 61
Manual transmission 60
Map
- changing scale 139
-destinationentry128
"Map direction of travel" 138
"Map facing north" 138
Maximum cooling 98
Maximum speed
- for winter tires 211
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Message list, traffic information 142
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter for automatic climate control 101
Microphone for telephone 14
Mirror dimming feature 53
Mirrors 51
- automatic curb monitor 52
- exterior mirrors 51
- heating 52
- interior rearview mirror 52
"Missed calls" 184
Missed calls 184
Mobile phone
-accepted calls 184
- adjusting volume 181
- calling 183
- ending call 183
- missed calls 184
– operation via iDrive 181
- redialing 184
- Top 8 184
– touch tone dialing 186
Mobile phone, installation location, refer to Center armrest 107
Mobile phone, refer to the separate Owner's Manual
Modifications, technical, refer to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring system for tire pressures, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84
"Monitor on / off" 54
Most recent mobile phone numbers 184
MP3, refer to Compressed audio files 163
Multifunctional steering wheel, refer to Buttons on the steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/headlamp flasher 62
– refer to Wiper system 63
Music tracks, refer to Tracks 164
"Mute on / off" 54
N
"Navigation" 123, 129
Navigation announcements, refer to Switching voice instructions on/off 140
Navigation drive, location 122
Navigation DVD 122
- drive 150
Navigation system 122
- address book 131
- changing a route 141
- destination entry 123
-destination list 130
– displaying current position 144
- entering a destination manually 123, 127
– last destinations 130
– navigation DVD 122
- opening 123
-route display 137
- route list 139
– searching for a special destination 129
– selecting destination using information 129
– selecting destination via map 128
-selecting route criteria 134
– starting destination guidance 136
– switching off, refer to Terminating/continuing destination guidance 136
- terminating/continuing destination guidance 136
- voice instructions 140
– volume adjustment 140
"Navigation voice instructions" 139
"Navigation voice instructions" via buttons on steering wheel 53
Neck support, refer to Head restraints 47
Nets, refer to Storage compartments 107
"New address" in navigation 132
"New destination" 124, 128
"New route" 141
New tires 210
"Next entertainment source" 54
North-facing map 138
Number of cylinders, refer to Engine data 236
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket for On-Board Diagnosis 218
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel specifications 202
Odometer 67
Oil, refer to Engine oil 213
Oil consumption 213
Oil level 213
Old batteries, refer to Disposal 227
"On a new destination" in navigation 130
"Onboard info" 69
Onboard tool kit 223
"On destination" 130
"On location" 130
Opening and closing
- convenient access 36
– from inside 32
- from outside 29
- using the door lock 32
– via the remote control 29
Operation by voice for mobile phone 187
-adjusting volume 188
-canceling 187
- correcting phone number 188
-dialing phone number 188
- placing a call 188
- redialing 188
- voice commands 187
- voice phone book 188
"Options" 195, 196
Orientation menu, refer to Start menu 17
Outlets, refer to Ventilation 100
Output, refer to Engine data 236
Outside temperature display 67
- changing unit of measure 71
-on computer 71
Outside temperature warning 67
Overriding selector lever lock 62
P
Paintwork care 220
Park assistant, refer to Park Distance Control 81
Park Distance Control PDC 81
"Parked car operation" 101
"Parked car ventilation" 101
Parked car ventilation 101
- activating switch-on time 102
– preselecting switch-on times 101
- switching on and off directly 101
Parking
- vehicle 59
Parking aid, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 81
Parking brake 59
-indicator lamp 60
Parking lamps/low beams 92
- replacing bulbs 224
Parts and accessories, refer to The individual vehicle 5
Passenger-side mirror tilt function 52
"Pathway lighting" 93
Pathway lighting 93
"PDC" 81
Personal Profile 28
"Perspective" 138
Phone book 181
Phone numbers
– deleting from phone book 185
-dialing 183
-most recent numbers 184
– selecting in phone book 184
- Top 8 184
Pinch protection system
-glass roof,electric 40
-windows 39
Placing a call, refer to telephone owner's manual
"Play" for satellite radio 161
Polish 222
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter 101
Position
- displaying 144
– saving, refer to Storing current position 132
Power windows 38
Power windows, refer to Windows 38
"Presets", displaying with the radio 154
"Presets" for satellite radio 161
Pressure, tires 204
Pressure monitoring of tires, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84
Pressure monitoring of tires, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85
Programmable buttons on the steering wheel 11
Programmable memory keys 21
Protection function, refer to Pinch protection system
- glass roof, electric 40
-windows 39
Providing medical assistance, refer to First add pouch 230
Puncture
- Flat Tire Monitor 84
R
Radio
- autostore 155
- controls 150
– High Definition Radio 157
– listening to stations 154
- sampling stations 155
– satellite radio 160
– selecting a waveband 150, 154
– selecting the frequency manually 155
- station search 155
– stations with best reception 155
- storing stations 156
- switching on/off 150
-tone control 151
- volume 151
Radio position, refer to Radio readiness 58
Radio readiness 58
- switched off 58
- switched on 58
Rain sensor 63
"Random", refer to Random play 166
"Random all" for audio mode 167
"Random directory" for audio mode 167
Random play 166
"RDS" Radio Data System 157
Reading lamps 96
Rear fog lamps
- replacing bulb 226
Rear lamps, refer to Tail lamps 225
Rear-mounted luggage rack 119
Rear seats
- adjusting head restraints 48
– folding down backrests 108
Rearview mirror, refer to Mirrors 51
Rear window defroster 100
"Received calls" 184
Receiving level of mobile phone, refer to Status information 20
Recirculated-air mode 99
Recirculation of air, refer to Recirculated-air mode 99
Recording times, refer to Stopwatch 79
"Redial" on the mobile phone 184
Reflectors, refer to Tail lamps 225
Refueling 202
Releasing
- hood 212
Remaining distance, refer to Computer 69
Remaining distance, refer to Cruising range 69
Remote control 28
-battery renewal 37
- convenient access 36
- garage door opener 103
– luggage compartment lid 30
– malfunctions 31, 37
- removing from the ignition lock 58
- service data 217
Remote control key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 28
"Repeat directory" for audio mode 166
"Repeat" for audio mode 166
"Repeat track" for audio mode 166
Replacement fuses, refer to Fuses 227
Replacement remote control 28
Replacing bulbs, refer to Lamps and bulbs 223
Replacing tires, refer to New wheels and tires 210
Reporting safety defects 6
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel gauge 68
Reservoir for washer systems 64
"Reset" 84, 86
-tone settings 153
Reset, refer to Resetting tone settings 152
"Reset" for stopwatch 79
Residual heat 100
Restraint systems, refer to Safety belts 51
Restraint systems for children 55
Retreaded tires 210
Reverse
- CD changer 167
- CD player 167
Reverse gear
– automatic transmission with Steptronic 61
– manual transmission 60
Road map 138
"Roadside Assistance" 192
Roadside Assistance 192, 229
Roadside parking lamps 94
-replacing bulbs 224
Roadworthiness test, refer to Service requirements 72
Rollover protection system, convertible 90
- resetting 91
Roof load capacity 239
Roof-mounted luggage rack 118
Rope, refer to Tow-starting, towing away 232
Rotary/pushbutton control, refer to Controller 16
Route 134
- arrow display 137
- changing 141
- display 137
– displaying streets and towns/cities 139
– displaying town 139
-list 139
- map display 138
-selecting 134
-selecting criteria 134
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Run-Flat Tires 210
Runflat System Component RSC, refer to Run-Flat Tires 210
Run-Flat Tires 210
- continuing driving with a damaged tire 85
- flat tire 85
- new tires 210
– remaining driving distance, refer to Indication of a flat tire 85
- tire inflation pressure 204
- winter tires 211
Runflat Tyres, refer to Run-Flat Tires 210
S
Safety-belt height adjustment 51
Safety belts 51
- damage 51
-indicator lamp 51
- reminder 51
- sitting safely 45
Safety systems
- airbags 89
- Antilock Brake System ABS 82
– Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82
- rollover protection system, convertible 90
- safety belts 51
Safety tires, refer to Run-Flat Tires 210
"SAT" 150, 160
Satellite radio 160
– displaying additional information 161
- enabling 160
-selecting channel 161
-storing channel 161
Saving fuel 114
"Scan"
– sampling radio stations 155
- sampling tracks on CD 165
Scan
- CD changer 165
- CD player 165
- radio 155
"Scan all" for audio mode 165
"Scan directory" for audio mode 165
Screen, refer to iDrive 16
Screw thread for tow fitting 231
SDARS, refer to Satellite radio 160
Seat and mirror memory 49
Seat belt reminder, refer to 'Fasten safety belts' reminder 51
Seats 45
- heating 49
- sitting safely 45
Securing cargo 110, 111
"Select as destination" 130, 195
"Select current speed" 79
Selecting a country for navigation 124
Selecting an audio source 150
Selecting menu items 19
Selecting new scale for navigation 139
Selector lever, automatic transmission with Steptronic 61
"Service" 214
Service, refer to Roadside Assistance 229
Service car, refer to Roadside Assistance 229
Service data in remote control 217
"Service Info" 73, 193
Service Interval Display, refer to Condition Based Service CBS 217
"Service Request" 186, 193
Service requirement display, refer to Condition Based Service CBS 217
"Service requirements" 73, 193, 214
Service requirements 72
"Set date" 76
"Set time" 76
"Settings" 197
Settings
-clock, 12h/24h format 76
-date format 77
"Settings" for unlocking 30
Setting times, refer to Preselecting switch-on times 101
Shifting gears with automatic transmission with Steptronic 61
Shiftlock, refer to Changing selector lever positions 61
Short commands for the voice command system 240
Shortest route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 134
"Short route" in navigation 134
"Show current position" 129
"Show destination position" 129
Shuffled, refer to Random
- CD changer 166
- CD player 166
Side airbags 89
Side windows, refer to Windows 38
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sitting safely 45
-airbags 45
- safety belt 45
Ski bag 109
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to Glass roof, electric 39
Slot for remote control 58
Smokers' package, refer to Ashtray 107, 108
Snap-in adapter 189
Snap-in adapter, refer to Center armrest 107
Snow chains 211
Socket, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 108
Socket for On-Board Diagnosis OBD 218
Song search, refer to Playing a track 165
Sound, adjusting during audio playback, refer to Tone control 151
Sound output for entertainment on/off 150
Spare fuses 227
Speaking, refer to Voice instructions from navigation system 140
Special oils, refer to Specified engine oils 215
Specified engine oils 215
Speed
- for winter tires 211
Speed-dependent volume control 151
Speed display, refer to Speedometer 12
Speed limit 79
Speed limit warning, refer to Speed limit 79
Speedometer 12
"Speed volume", refer to Tone control 152
Sport program, automatic transmission with Steptronic 61
Spray nozzles, refer to Windshield washer nozzles 64
Stability control, refer to Driving stability control systems 82
Start/stop button 58
- starting the engine 59
- switching off the engine 59
"Start guidance" 126
Starting, refer to Starting the engine 59
Starting assistance, refer to Jump starting 230
Starting the engine
-start/stop button 58
Start menu 17
"Start service" 192
"Start service" for BMW Assist 195
"State / Province" in destination entry 124
Station
– refer to Radio 154
"Status" 73
Status of this Owner's Manual at time of printing 5
Steam jet 219, 220
Steering wheel 53
- adjustment 53
- buttons on steering wheel 11
– freely programmable buttons 53
"Steering wheel buttons" 53
Steering with variable ratio, refer to Active steering 88
Steptronic, refer to Automatic transmission with Steptronic 60
"Stopwatch" 79
Stopwatch 79
Storage 222
Storage compartment package 107
Storage compartments 107
"Store" for satellite radio 162
"Store in address book" in navigation 132
"Store" on the radio 156
Storing
- seat position, refer to Seat and mirror memory 49
– telephone numbers, refer to separate Owner's Manual
Storing current position 132
Storing radio stations 156
Storing tires 211
Stowage, refer to Storage compartments 107
"Street" in destination entry 126
Summer tires, refer to Wheels and tires 204
"Surround Settings", refer to Tone control 152
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
- engine 59
Switching off the engine
-start/stop button 58
Switching on
- audio 150
- CD changer 150
- CD player 150
- radio 150
Switching on the hour signal 76
Switching the cooling function on and off 100
Switch-on times of parked car ventilation, preselecting 101
Symbols 4
– navigation system 143
- status information 20
- traffic info for navigation system 141
T
Tachometer 67
Tail lamp, refer to Tail lamps 225
-replacing bulb 226
Tail lamps 225
-replacing bulb 226
Tank contents, refer to Capacities 239
Technical changes 5
Technical data 236
Telematics, refer to BMW TeleServices, BMW Assist 191
Telephone, installation location, refer to Center armrest 107
Telephone, refer to Mobile phone 176
Telephone, refer to separate Owner's Manual
"Telephone list" 54
Temperature, setting for automatic climate control 98
Temperature display
- outside temperature 67
- outside temperature warning 67
- setting the units 71
Tempomat, refer to Cruise control 65
"Text language", refer to Language of Control Display 80
"Theater" for Tone control 152
Thigh support 46
Third brake lamp, refer to Center brake lamp 226
Three-point safety belt 51
Through-loading system 108
Tilt alarm sensor 35
Tilt function, passenger-side mirror 52
"Time / Date" 75, 76
"Time format" 76
Timer, refer to Preselecting switch-on times 101
Tire inflation pressure 204
- loss 85, 86
Tire pressure monitoring, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85
- resetting the system 86
– system limitations 85
- warning lamp 87
Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 85
Tire Quality Grading 208
Tires
- age 208, 210
- air loss 87
- breaking in 114
- changing, refer to Changing wheels 226
- condition 209
- damage 209
– inflation pressure 204
- labels 208
- minimum tread depth 209
- new tires 210
– pressure monitoring, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84
– pressure monitoring, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85
- puncture 85
- retreaded 210
- Run-Flat Tires 210
-size 208
- wear indicators, refer to Minimum tread depth 209
- winter tires 211
Tires, FTM 84
TMC station, refer to Traffic information 141
"Tone" 151
Tone in audio mode
-adjusting 151
- middle setting 152
Tools, refer to Onboard tool kit 223
"Top 8" for mobile phone 184
Torque, refer to Engine data 236
Touch tone dialing 186
Tow bar 232
Tow fitting 231
Tow fittings for tow-starting and towing away 231
Towing 231
– car with automatic transmission 231
-methods 232
Towing and tow-starting 231
Town/city for destination 124
"Town / City" in destination entry 124
Tow rope 232
Tow-starting 231
"TPM" 86
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor 85
Tracks
– random play sequence 166
- sampling, Scan 165
– searching for 165
Traction control, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82
Traffic information for navigation
- calling up 142
– display on route map 143
– during destination guidance 144
-switching on/off 141
-symbols 143
"Traffic Info settings" 142
Traffic jam
– displaying traffic information 141
– driving around 144
Transmission
– automatic transmission with Steptronic 60
– manual transmission 60
Transporting children safely 55
Transport securing devices, refer to Securing cargo 118
Tread depth, refer to Minimum tire tread 209
Treble, refer to Treble and bass 151
Treble, tone control 151
"Trip computer" 70
Trip computer 70
Trip-distance counter, refer to Trip odometer 67
"Triple turn signal" 63
Triple turn signal activation 63
Trip odometer 67
Trunk, refer to Cargo bay
Trunk lid, refer to Luggage compartment lid 33
Turn, indicating
– triple turn signal 63
Turning circle, refer to Dimensions 237
Turn signals 62
- indicator lamp 12
– replacing bulbs 225
Tying down loads, refer to Cargo loading 118
U
Underbody protection, refer to Caring for your vehicle
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/UTQR 208
"Units" 71
Units of measure
- average fuel consumption 71
- temperature 71
Universal garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 103
Universal remote control 103
Unlatching, refer to Unlocking 29
"Unlock button" 30
Unlocking
- from inside 33
- from outside 29
– luggage compartment lid 37
– without remote control, refer to Convenient access 36
Unlocking without a key, refer to Convenient access 36
"Update services" 194, 196
USB-audio interface 170
"USB" for audio mode 169, 171
V
Vehicle
-battery 227
- breaking in 114
- cargo loading 117
– decommissioning, refer to Vehicle storage
- dimensions 237
– Identification Number, refer to Engine compartment 213
- parking 59
- weight 239
"Vehicle / Tires" for unlocking 30
Vehicle jack 227
Vehicle position, refer to Displaying current position 144
Vehicle storage 222
Ventilation 100
-draft-free 100
Ventilation when parked, refer to Parked car ventilation 101
Vents, refer to Ventilation 100
"Vent settings" 98
Voice commands
- overview 23
– short commands 240
Voice instructions from navigation system 140
-muting 54,140
- repeating 54, 140
– switching on/off 54, 140
-volume 140
Voice phone book 188
Volume 150
- audio sources 150
– fuel tank, refer to Capacities 239
- mobile phone 181
- speed-dependent control 151
- voice instructions 140
Volume distribution
-front/rear 151
- left/right 151
W
Warning and indicator lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to Check Control 77
Warning triangle 230
Washer fluid 64
– content of the reservoir 64
Washer fluid filler neck 64
Waste tray, refer to Ashtray 107
Water on roads, refer to Driving through water 116
Water penetration 219, 220
Waveband with the radio 154
Wear indicators in tires, refer to Minimum tread depth 209
Weights 239
Welcome lamps 92
Wheelbase, refer to Dimensions 237
Wheels, new 210
Wheels and tires 204
Width, refer to Dimensions 237
Windows 38
- convenient operation 30
– convenient operation with convenient access 36
- opening, closing 38
– pinch protection system 39
Windows, defrosting and removing condensation 100
Windshield
- cleaning 64
– defrosting and removing condensation 100
Windshield wash
- filling capacity, reservoir 239
Windshield washer reservoir, refer to Washer fluid filler neck 64
Windshield washer system 63
-washer fluid 64
- washer nozzles 64
Windshield wiper blades, changing 223
Windshield wipers, refer to Wiper system 63
Winter tires 211
- setting speed limit 79
- storage 211
Wiper blade replacement 223
Wiper system 63
"With highways" in navigation 134
Word-matching principle for navigation 135
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to Onboard tool kit 223
X
Xenon lamps
- replacing bulb 223
01 41 0 014 954 ue iDrive
- CONTENTS A TO Z
- 128I OWNER'S MANUAL FOR VEHICLE
- CONTENTS
- USING THIS OWNER'S MANUAL
- AT A GLANCE
- CONTROLS
- DRIVING TIPS
- NAVIGATION
- ENTERTAINMENT
- COMMUNICATIONS
- MOBILITY
- REFERENCE
- NOTES
- ADDITIONAL SOURCES OF INFORMATION
- SYMBOLS USED
- SYMBOLS ON VEHICLE COMPONENTS
- THE INDIVIDUAL VEHICLE
- EDITORIAL NOTICE
- FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY
- MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
- PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
- CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
- SERVICE AND WARRANTY
- REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
- FOR US CUSTOMERS
- FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
- COCKPIT
- INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
- INDICATOR AND WARNING LAMPS
- INDICATOR LAMPS WITHOUT TEXT MESSAGES
- AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE: CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS
- IDRIVE
- MENU OVERVIEW
- COMMUNICATION
- CLIMATE
- I MENU
- OPERATING PRINCIPLE
- OPENING START MENU
- CALLING UP MENU ITEMS IN THE START MENU
- CONVENIENT CALL-UP OF MENU ITEMS
- DISPLAYS IN MENU
- OPERATING PRINCIPLE AT A GLANCE
- 1 SELECTING A MENU ITEM
- 2 ACTIVATING A MENU ITEM
- 3 SELECTING A MENU ITEM: REFER TO 1
- 4 SWITCHING BETWEEN FIELDS
- 5 ADJUSTING SETTINGS
- STATUS INFORMATION
- 1 DISPLAY FOR
- 2 ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO OUTPUT OFF
- 3 DISPLAY FOR TRAFFIC INFORMATION * : "TI
- 4 DISPLAY FOR
- 6 TIME
- CLOSING/OPENING THE SCREEN
- CLOSING THE SCREEN
- OPENING THE SCREEN
- SETTING THE CONDITIONS FOR OPENING THE SCREEN AUTOMATICALLY
- PROGRAMMABLE MEMORY KEYS
- STORING FUNCTIONS
- NAVIGATION* DESTINATIONS
- TELEPHONE, PHONE NUMBERS
- EXECUTING A FUNCTION
- DISPLAYING MEMORY KEY ASSIGNMENTS
- DISPLAYING BRIEF INFORMATION
- DISPLAYING DETAILED INFORMATION
- CLEARING KEY ASSIGNMENTS
- VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
- THE CONCEPT
- PRECONDITION
- SYMBOLS IN THE OWNER'S MANUAL
- SAYING COMMANDS
- ACTIVATING VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
- TERMINATING OR CANCELING VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
- COMMANDS
- HAVING THE POSSIBLE COMMANDS READ ALOUD
- OPENING HELP
- USING ALTERNATIVE COMMANDS
- CALLING UP FUNCTIONS IMMEDIATELY VIA SHORT COMMANDS
- OPENING THE START MENU
- EXAMPLE: SELECTING A TRACK
- OPENING AND CLOSING
- REMOTE CONTROL
- INTEGRATED KEY
- NEW REMOTE CONTROLS
- PERSONAL PROFILE
- PERSONAL PROFILE SETTINGS
- CENTRAL LOCKING SYSTEM
- OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE
- OPERATING FROM INSIDE
- OPENING AND CLOSING: USING THE REMOTE CONTROL
- UNLOCKING
- SETTING UNLOCKING CHARACTERISTICS
- COUPE: CONVENIENT OPENING
- CONVERTIBLE: CONVENIENT OPENING
- LOCKING
- CONVERTIBLE: CONVENIENT CLOSING
- SWITCHING ON INTERIOR LAMPS
- UNLOCKING THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LID
- CONFIRMATION SIGNALS
- MALFUNCTIONS
- FOR US OWNERS ONLY
- OPENING AND CLOSING: USING THE DOOR LOCK
- CONVENIENT OPERATION
- MANUAL OPERATION
- OPENING AND CLOSING: FROM INSIDE
- AUTOMATIC LOCKING
- UNLOCKING AND OPENING DOORS
- LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LID
- OPENING FROM INSIDE
- OPENING FROM OUTSIDE
- OPENING MANUALLY
- LOCKING OR UNLOCKING SEPARATELY
- LOCKING SEPARATELY
- UNLOCKING SEPARATELY
- EMERGENCY RELEASE
- CLOSING
- ALARM SYSTEM
- ARMING AND DISARMING
- PANIC MODE
- SWITCHING OFF AN ALARM
- INDICATOR LAMP DISPLAYS
- TILT ALARM SENSOR
- INTERIOR MOTION SENSOR
- COUPE
- CONVERTIBLE
- AVOIDING UNINTENTIONAL ALARMS
- SWITCHING OFF TILT ALARM SENSOR AND INTERIOR MOTION SENSOR
- CONVENIENT ACCESS
- FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT
- COMPARISON TO THE STANDARD REMOTE CONTROL
- COUPE: CONVENIENT CLOSURE
- CONVERTIBLE: WINDOW AND CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION
- UNLOCKING THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LID SEPARATELY
- SWITCHING ON RADIO READINESS
- STARTING THE ENGINE
- SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE IN CARS WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
- BEFORE DRIVING A VEHICLE WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION INTO A CAR WASH
- WARNING LAMPS
- REPLACING THE BATTERY
- WINDOWS
- CONVERTIBLE: OPENING, CLOSING
- AFTER SWITCHING OFF THE IGNITION
- PINCH PROTECTION SYSTEM
- CLOSING WITHOUT PINCH PROTECTION
- COUPE: GLASS ROOF*, ELECTRIC
- RAISING
- OPENING, CLOSING
- FOLLOWING INTERRUPTIONS IN ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY
- CLOSING MANUALLY
- CONVERTIBLE: TOP
- BEFORE OPENING AND CLOSING
- OPERATION WHILE DRIVING
- LEDS
- INTERRUPTION
- CONVENIENT OPERATION WITH REMOTE CONTROL OR VIA DOOR LOCK
- BEFORE CLOSING
- WIND DEFLECTOR
- INSTALLATION
- REMOVING THE WIND DEFLECTOR
- ADJUSTMENTS
- SITTING SAFELY
- AIRBAGS
- HEAD RESTRAINT
- SAFETY BELT
- SEATS
- NOTE BEFORE ADJUSTING
- MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
- LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION
- HEIGHT
- ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT
- HEAD RESTRAINTS
- FRONT SEATS
- HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
- REMOVING
- REAR SEATS
- COUPE: HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
- CONVERTIBLE: RAISING AND LOWERING
- COUPE: FOLDING HEAD RESTRAINT DOWN AND UP
- SEAT WITH MANUAL LONGITUDINAL ADJUSTMENT
- CONVENIENT ENTRY
- PREVIOUS POSITION
- SEAT WITH ELECTRICAL LONGITUDINAL ADJUSTMENT
- HEATED SEATS
- SEAT AND MIRROR MEMORY
- STORING
- CALL-UP
- CONVENIENCE MODE
- SAFETY FEATURE
- CALL-UP WITH THE REMOTE CONTROL
- SELECTING AUTOMATIC CALL-UP
- SWITCHING OFF AUTOMATIC CALL-UP
- SAFETY BELTS
- OPENING
- FASTEN SAFETY BELTS' REMINDER FOR FRONT SEATS
- DAMAGE TO SAFETY BELTS
- MIRRORS
- EXTERIOR MIRRORS
- FOLDING MIRRORS IN AND OUT
- AUTOMATIC HEATING
- PASSENGER-SIDE MIRROR TILT FUNCTION – AUTOMATIC CURB MONITOR
- ACTIVATING
- DEACTIVATING
- INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR MIRRORS, AUTOMATIC DIMMING FEATURE
- STEERING WHEEL
- PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS ON THE STEERING WHEEL
- OPERATING A FUNCTION
- TRANSPORTING CHILDREN SAFELY
- THE RIGHT PLACE FOR CHILDREN
- CHILDREN ALWAYS IN THE REAR
- EXCEPTION FOR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
- INSTALLING CHILD-RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
- ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
- BACKREST WIDTH
- CHILD SEAT SECURITY
- TO LOCK THE SAFETY BELT
- TO UNLOCK THE SAFETY BELT
- LATCH CHILD-RESTRAINT FIXING SYSTEM
- COUPE: REAR SEATS
- CONVERTIBLE: REAR SEATS
- COUPE: CHILD-RESTRAINT SYSTEM WITH TETHER STRAP
- COUPE: PLACEMENT OF THE TETHER STRAP
- DRIVING
- IGNITION LOCK
- REMOVING THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM THE IGNITION LOCK
- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
- START/STOP BUTTON
- RADIO READINESS
- IGNITION ON
- RADIO READINESS AND IGNITION OFF
- MANUAL TRANSMISSION
- SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
- PARKING BRAKE
- INDICATOR LAMP
- APPLYING
- REVERSE GEAR
- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WITH STEPTRONIC
- VEHICLE PARKING
- DISENGAGING THE REMOTE CONTROL
- SELECTOR LEVER POSITIONS
- CHANGING SELECTOR LEVER POSITIONS
- P PARK
- R REVERSE
- N NEUTRAL
- D DRIVE, AUTOMATIC POSITION
- KICK-DOWN
- SPORT PROGRAM AND MANUAL OPERATION M/S
- SHIFTING GEARS VIA THE SELECTOR LEVER
- SHIFTING GEARS VIA SHIFT PADDLES* ON THE STEERING WHEEL
- OVERRIDING SELECTOR LEVER LOCK
- TURN SIGNALS/HEADLAMP FLASHER
- USING TURN SIGNALS
- INDICATING A TURN BRIEFLY
- TRIPLE TURN SIGNAL ACTIVATION
- WIPER SYSTEM
- SWITCHING ON WIPERS
- NORMAL WIPER SPEED
- FAST WIPER SPEED
- INTERMITTENT WIPE OR RAIN SENSOR
- ACTIVATING INTERMITTENT WIPE OR RAIN SENSOR
- SETTING SPEED FOR INTERMITTENT WIPE OR SENSITIVITY OF THE RAIN SENSOR
- DEACTIVATING INTERMITTENT WIPE OR RAIN SENSOR
- CLEANING WINDSHIELD AND HEADLAMPS
- WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLES
- WASHER FLUID
- WASHER FLUID FILLER NECK
- CAPACITY
- CRUISE CONTROL
- ONE LEVER FOR ALL FUNCTIONS
- MAINTAINING CURRENT SPEED
- INCREASING SPEED
- ACCELERATING USING THE LEVER
- DECREASING SPEED
- DEACTIVATING CRUISE CONTROL
- RESUMING A SPEED STORED BEFOREHAND
- DISPLAY IN THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
- EVERYTHING UNDER CONTROL
- ODOMETER, OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY, CLOCK
- KNOB IN THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
- UNITS OF MEASURE
- TIME, OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
- OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE WARNING
- ODOMETER AND TRIP ODOMETER
- WHEN THE VEHICLE IS PARKED
- TACHOMETER
- COOLANT TEMPERATURE
- ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
- FUEL GAUGE
- RESERVE
- COMPUTER
- DISPLAYS IN THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
- CALLING UP INFORMATION
- CRUISING RANGE
- AVERAGE SPEED
- AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION
- CURRENT FUEL CONSUMPTION
- DISPLAYS ON THE CONTROL DISPLAY
- RESETTING VALUES
- ENTERING A DISTANCE MANUALLY
- TRIP COMPUTER
- SETTINGS AND INFORMATION
- ADJUSTING THE UNITS OF MEASURE
- EXITING DISPLAYS
- SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
- POSSIBLE DISPLAYS
- SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION
- SYMBOLS
- ENTERING DEADLINES FOR LEGALLY REQUIRED INSPECTIONS
- CLOCK
- SETTING THE TIME
- IN THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
- VIA IDRIVE
- ADJUSTING SETTINGS
- SWITCHING ON THE HOUR SIGNAL
- SETTING THE 12H/24H FORMAT
- DATE
- SETTING THE DATE
- SETTING THE DATE FORMAT
- CHECK CONTROL
- HIDING CHECK CONTROL MESSAGES
- VIEWING STORED CHECK CONTROL MESSAGES
- VIEWING MORE INFORMATION LATER
- SPEED LIMIT
- SETTING OR CHANGING THE LIMIT
- APPLYING YOUR CURRENT SPEED AS LIMIT
- ACTIVATING THE LIMIT
- STOPWATCH
- STARTING, STOPPING OR RESETTING
- TAKING AN INTERIM TIME READING
- ALTERING SETTINGS
- LANGUAGE ON THE CONTROL DISPLAY
- BRIGHTNESS OF THE CONTROL DISPLAY
- TECHNOLOGY FOR DRIVING COMFORT AND SAFETY
- PARK DISTANCE CONTROL PDC
- SWITCHING ON AUTOMATICALLY
- SWITCHING OFF AUTOMATICALLY
- SIGNAL TONES
- MALFUNCTION
- PDC WITH VISUAL WARNING
- SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
- DRIVING STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEMS
- ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS
- ELECTRONIC BRAKE-FORCE DISTRIBUTION EBV
- DYNAMIC BRAKE CONTROL DBC
- DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL DSC
- DEACTIVATING DSC
- ACTIVATING DSC
- FOR BETTER CONTROL
- DYNAMIC TRACTION CONTROL DTC
- ACTIVATING DTC
- DEACTIVATING DTC
- DRIVE-OFF ASSISTANT
- FLAT TIRE MONITOR FTM
- INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM
- INDICATION OF A FLAT TIRE
- TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR TPM
- STATUS INDICATOR ON THE CONTROL DISPLAY
- GREEN
- ONE WHEEL YELLOW
- ALL WHEELS YELLOW
- GRAY
- RESETTING THE SYSTEM
- MESSAGE FOR LOW TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
- MESSAGE FOR UNSUCCESSFUL SYSTEM RESET
- DECLARATION ACCORDING TO NHTSA/FMVSS 138
- TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEMS
- ACTIVE STEERING
- BRAKE FORCE DISPLAY
- PROTECTIVE ACTION
- AUTOMATIC DEACTIVATION OF THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAGS
- STATUS OF FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAGS
- OPERATIONAL READINESS OF AIRBAG SYSTEM
- AIRBAG SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
- CONVERTIBLE: ROLLOVER PROTECTION SYSTEM
- RESETTING
- LAMPS
- PARKING LAMPS/LOW BEAMS
- PARKING LAMPS
- LOW-BEAM HEADLAMPS
- AUTOMATIC HEADLAMP CONTROL
- WELCOME LAMPS
- ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING WELCOME LAMPS
- PATHWAY LIGHTING
- DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
- ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
- ADAPTIVE HEAD LIGHT
- ACTIVATING ADAPTIVE HEAD LIGHT
- HIGH BEAMS/ROADSIDE PARKING LAMPS
- ROADSIDE PARKING LAMPS, LEFT OR RIGHT
- SWITCHING ON
- SWITCHING OFF
- FOG LAMPS
- INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
- INTERIOR LAMPS
- SWITCHING INTERIOR LAMPS ON/OFF MANUALLY
- READING LAMPS
- AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
- COMFORTABLE INTERIOR CLIMATE
- ADJUSTING AIR DISTRIBUTION MANUALLY
- FINE ADJUSTMENTS TO MANUAL AIR DISTRIBUTION
- TEMPERATURE
- MAXIMUM COOLING
- AUTO PROGRAM
- INTENSITY OF THE AUTO PROGRAM
- CONVERTIBLE PROGRAM
- ADJUSTING AIR FLOW RATE MANUALLY
- SWITCHING THE SYSTEM ON/OFF
- AUTOMATIC RECIRCULATED-AIR CONTROL AUC/RECIRCULATED-AIR MODE
- VIA THE BUTTON* ON THE STEERING WHEEL
- RESIDUAL HEAT
- WINDOWS, DEFROSTING AND REMOVING CONDENSATION
- SWITCHING COOLING FUNCTION ON/OFF
- REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
- VENTILATION
- VENTILATION FOR COOLING
- DRAFT-FREE VENTILATION
- MICROFILTER/ACTIVATED-CHARCOAL FILTER
- PARKED CAR VENTILATION
- SWITCHING ON/OFF DIRECTLY
- PRESELECTING SWITCH-ON TIMES
- ACTIVATING SWITCH-ON TIMES
- PRACTICAL INTERIOR ACCESSORIES
- INTEGRATED UNIVERSAL REMOTE CONTROL
- CHECKING COMPATIBILITY
- FIXED-CODE HAND-HELD TRANSMITTERS
- ALTERNATING-CODE HAND-HELD TRANSMITTERS
- DELETING ALL STORED PROGRAMS
- REASSIGNING INDIVIDUAL PROGRAMS
- DIGITAL COMPASS
- SETTING COMPASS ZONES
- CALIBRATING THE DIGITAL COMPASS
- PROCEDURE
- SETTING RIGHT-HAND/LEFT-HAND STEERING
- SETTING THE LANGUAGE
- GLOVE COMPARTMENT
- LED HAND LAMP
- CENTER ARMREST
- STORAGE COMPARTMENT
- CONNECTION FOR EXTERNAL AUDIO DEVICE
- STORAGE COMPARTMENTS INSIDE THE VEHICLE
- COUPE: CLOTHES HOOKS
- CUP HOLDERS
- ASHTRAY
- EMPTYING
- LIGHTER
- CONNECTING ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES
- CIGARETTE LIGHTER SOCKET
- IN THE CARGO BAY
- IN THE CENTER CONSOLE
- COUPE: THROUGH-LOADING SYSTEM
- CONVERTIBLE: CARGO LOADING
- STORAGE COMPARTMENTS INSIDE THE CARGO BAY
- COUPE: SKI BAG
- LOADING
- REMOVING THE SKI BAG
- CONVERTIBLE: THROUGH-LOADING OPENING WITH INTEGRATED TRANSPORT BAG
- THINGS TO REMEMBER WHEN DRIVING
- BREAK-IN PERIOD
- ENGINE AND DIFFERENTIAL
- UP TO 1,200 MILES/2,000 KM
- AFTER DRIVING 1,200 MILES/2,000 KM
- TIRES
- BRAKE SYSTEM
- CLUTCH
- FOLLOWING PART REPLACEMENT
- SAVING FUEL
- REMOVE ANY UNNEEDED CARGO
- REMOVE ANY MOUNTED PARTS AFTER YOU HAVE FINISHED USING THEM
- CLOSE THE WINDOWS AND GLASS ROOF
- CHECK TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE REGULARLY
- SET OFF IMMEDIATELY
- DRIVE DEFENSIVELY
- AVOID HIGH ENGINE SPEEDS
- COASTING
- SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE DURING LENGTHY STOPS
- SWITCH OFF FUNCTIONS YOU DO NOT NEED AT THE MOMENT
- HAVE THE VEHICLE SERVICED
- GENERAL DRIVING NOTES
- CLOSE THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LID
- HOT EXHAUST SYSTEM
- HYDROPLANING
- DRIVING THROUGH WATER
- USE THE PARKING BRAKE ON INCLINES
- BRAKING SAFELY
- DRIVING IN WET CONDITIONS
- HILLS
- CORROSION ON BRAKE ROTORS
- BEFORE DRIVING INTO A CAR WASH
- WITH CONVENIENT ACCESS AND AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
- CARGO LOADING
- STOWING CARGO
- SECURING CARGO
- COUPE: ROOF-MOUNTED LUGGAGE RACK
- MOUNTING POINTS
- LOADING ROOF-MOUNTED LUGGAGE RACK
- REAR-MOUNTED LUGGAGE RACK
- LOADING THE REAR-MOUNTED LUGGAGE RACK
- STARTING THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
- NAVIGATION DVD
- REMOVING NAVIGATION DVD
- DESTINATION ENTRY
- OPENING NAVIGATION
- ENTERING A DESTINATION MANUALLY
- SELECTING COUNTRY
- ENTERING DESTINATION BY TOWN/CITY NAME
- ENTERING DESTINATION BY ZIP CODE
- ENTERING STREET, HOUSE NUMBER AND INTERSECTION
- ENTERING STREET AND INTERSECTION
- ENTERING A STREET WITHOUT ENTERING A TOWN/CITY
- ENTERING A HOUSE NUMBER
- STARTING DESTINATION GUIDANCE WITH MANUAL DESTINATION ENTRY
- ENTERING A DESTINATION BY VOICE COMMANDS
- ENTERING A DESTINATION
- SPELLING THE DESTINATION
- ENTERING THE DESTINATION AS AN ENTIRE WORD
- ENTERING STREET AND HOUSE NUMBER
- STARTING DESTINATION GUIDANCE
- STORING DESTINATIONS
- MAP-GUIDED DESTINATION SELECTION
- SELECTING DESTINATION USING INFORMATION
- SELECT LOCATION
- SYMBOLS IN THE MAP DISPLAY
- DESTINATION LIST
- TRANSFERRING DESTINATION FOR DESTINATION GUIDANCE
- EDITING DESTINATION LIST
- ADDRESS BOOK
- OPENING ADDRESS BOOK
- STORING DESTINATIONS IN ADDRESS BOOK
- STORING CURRENT POSITION
- SELECTING DESTINATIONS FROM ADDRESS BOOK
- CHANGING DESTINATIONS FROM ADDRESS BOOK
- DELETING INDIVIDUAL DESTINATIONS FROM ADDRESS BOOK
- DELETING ALL DESTINATIONS FROM ADDRESS BOOK
- HOME ADDRESS
- STORING HOME ADDRESS
- USING HOME ADDRESS AS DESTINATION
- CHANGING HOME ADDRESS
- ROUTE SELECTION
- CHANGING ROUTE CRITERIA
- WORD-MATCHING PRINCIPLE
- DESTINATION GUIDANCE
- VIA PROGRAMMABLE MEMORY KEYS
- TERMINATING/CONTINUING DESTINATION GUIDANCE
- IN THE DESTINATION LIST
- ROUTE DISPLAY
- ARROW DISPLAY
- MAP DISPLAY
- CHANGING THE MAP DISPLAY
- CHANGING THE SCALE
- DISPLAYING TOWNS/CITIES AND STREETS ALONG THE ROUTE
- DESTINATION GUIDANCE THROUGH VOICE INSTRUCTIONS
- REPEATING OR CANCELING VOICE INSTRUCTIONS
- ADJUSTING VOLUME FOR VOICE INSTRUCTIONS
- CHANGING A ROUTE
- TRAFFIC INFORMATION
- SWITCHING RECEPTION OF TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON/OFF
- CALLING UP TRAFFIC INFORMATION MANUALLY
- DURING DESTINATION GUIDANCE
- WITH DESTINATION GUIDANCE SWITCHED OFF
- DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION IN MAP DISPLAY
- DISPLAYING DETAILED TRAFFIC INFORMATION
- TRAFFIC INFORMATION ICONS
- TRAFFIC INFORMATION DURING DESTINATION GUIDANCE
- DISPLAYING TRAFFIC OBSTRUCTIONS
- DYNAMIC ROUTE PLANNING
- DISPLAYING CURRENT POSITION
- WHAT TO DO IF
- ON/OFF AND SETTINGS
- OPERATION VIA IDRIVE
- SWITCHING ON/OFF
- ADJUSTING VOLUME
- TONE CONTROL
- CHANGING TONE SETTINGS
- TREBLE AND BASS
- BALANCE AND FADER
- SPEED-DEPENDENT VOLUME CONTROL
- HIFI SYSTEM PROFESSIONAL
- INDIVIDUAL HIGH-END AUDIO SYSTEM
- EQUALIZER
- RESETTING TONE SETTINGS
- RADIO
- LISTENING TO THE RADIO
- CHANGING STATIONS
- BUTTONS ON THE CD PLAYER
- CHANGING SELECTION CRITERIA
- SAMPLING STATIONS, SCAN
- SELECTING THE FREQUENCY MANUALLY
- UPDATING STATIONS WITH BEST RECEPTION
- STORING STATIONS
- CHANGING A MEMORY POSITION
- RADIO DATA SYSTEM RDS
- SWITCHING RDS ON/OFF
- HIGH DEFINITION RADIO
- SWITCHING DIGITAL RADIO RECEPTION ON/OFF IDRIVE, FOR OPERATING PRINCIPLE REFER TO PAGE 16
- SELECTING THE PROGRAMS OF A DIGITAL STATION
- UPDATING DIGITALLY RECEIVABLE STATIONS
- DISPLAYING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
- SATELLITE RADIO
- ENABLING OR DISABLING CHANNELS
- ENABLING
- DISABLING
- SELECTING AND STORING A CHANNEL
- ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
- STORING A CHANNEL
- CHANGING CHANNELS WITH BUTTONS ON CD PLAYER
- CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER
- LISTENING TO CDS
- COMPRESSED AUDIO FILES
- STARTING THE CD PLAYER
- STARTING THE CD CHANGER
- SELECTING A TRACK
- DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT THE TRACK
- SAMPLING TRACKS, SCAN
- REPEATING TRACKS
- RANDOM PLAY SEQUENCE
- FAST FORWARD/REVERSE
- CD MAGAZINE
- REMOVING THE CD MAGAZINE
- INSERTING/REMOVING CDS FROM THE CD MAGAZINE
- INSERTING THE CD MAGAZINE
- GENERAL MALFUNCTIONS
- HUMIDITY
- MALFUNCTIONS WITH INDIVIDUAL CDS/DVDS
- SELF-RECORDED CDS/DVDS
- DAMAGE PREVENTION
- CDS/DVDS WITH COPY PROTECTION
- CARE
- AUX-IN PORT
- CONNECTING
- STARTING AUDIO PLAYBACK
- USB-AUDIO INTERFACE
- IPOD
- USB DEVICE
- NOTES ON CONNECTING
- TELEPHONING
- USING THE TELEPHONE INSIDE THE VEHICLE
- USING THE SNAP-IN ADAPTER
- FOR YOUR SAFETY
- SUITABLE MOBILE PHONES
- CARE INSTRUCTIONS
- OPERATING OPTIONS
- MAKING PHONE CALLS WITH THE BMW ASSIST SYSTEM*: BMW ASSIST CALLS
- START-UP
- PAIRING THE MOBILE PHONE WITH THE VEHICLE
- SWITCH ON IGNITION
- PREPARATION VIA IDRIVE
- PREPARATION VIA THE MOBILE PHONE
- PAIRING
- CHECKS TO PERFORM IF PAIRING IS UNSUCCESSFUL
- LIST OF PAIRED MOBILE PHONES
- UNPAIRING THE MOBILE PHONE FROM THE VEHICLE
- VOICE QUALITY
- REQUIREMENTS
- CALLING UP COMMUNICATION
- RECEIVING CALLS
- ACCEPTING A CALL
- REJECTING A CALL
- CALLING
- DIALING PHONE NUMBERS
- ENDING A CALL
- SELECTING A PHONE NUMBER FROM THE PHONE BOOK OR FROM A LIST OF STORED PHONE NUMBERS
- SELECTING PHONE NUMBERS FROM PHONE BOOK
- DIALING A STORED PHONE NUMBER FROM A LIST
- DELETING AN INDIVIDUAL ENTRY
- DELETING THE ENTIRE LIST
- BMW CONTACT
- DIALING PHONE NUMBERS VIA TOUCH TONES
- SWITCHING BETWEEN MOBILE PHONE AND HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
- FROM MOBILE PHONE TO HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
- FROM HANDS-FREE SYSTEM TO MOBILE PHONE
- OPERATION BY VOICE COMMANDS
- ACTIVATING THE SYSTEM
- ENDING/CANCELING OPERATION BY VOICE COMMANDS
- EXAMPLE: DIALING PHONE NUMBERS
- COMMAND VOICE CONTROL RESPONSE
- ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF THE INSTRUCTIONS
- CORRECTING PHONE NUMBERS
- DELETING PHONE NUMBERS
- VOICE PHONE BOOK
- SELECTING AN ENTRY
- REDIALING
- IMPORTANT FOR VOICE COMMANDS
- INSERTING/REMOVING SNAP-IN ADAPTER
- INSERTING MOBILE PHONE
- REMOVING MOBILE PHONE
- BMW ASSIST
- OFFERED SERVICES
- CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OFFERED SERVICES
- USING SERVICES
- CONTACTING THE BMW ASSIST RESPONSE CENTER
- ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
- BMW TELESERVICES
- AUTOMATIC BMW TELESERVICE CALL
- MANUAL BMW TELESERVICE CALL
- DISPLAYING AND UPDATING* BMW TELESERVICES
- CONTACTING BMW CUSTOMER RELATIONS
- CONCIERGE SERVICE
- CALLING THE CONCIERGE
- DISPLAYING TRANSMITTED DATA
- DIALING A PHONE NUMBER OR TRANSFERRING AN ADDRESS FOR DESTINATION GUIDANCE
- ADAPTING BMW ASSIST
- DISPLAYING AND UPDATING SERVICES
- ACTIVATING BMW ASSIST
- DISPLAYING VEHICLE DATA
- ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING THE BLUETOOTH LINK
- REFUELING
- FUEL FILLER DOOR
- MANUALLY RELEASING THE FUEL FILLER DOOR
- OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN REFUELING
- FUEL TANK CAPACITY
- FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
- REQUIRED FUEL
- SUPER PREMIUM GASOLINE/AKI 91
- USE HIGH-QUALITY BRANDS
- WHEELS AND TIRES
- TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES
- INFORMATION FOR YOUR SAFETY
- CHECKING PRESSURE
- INFLATION PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS
- TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES FOR DRIVING UP TO 100 MPH OR 160 KM/H
- TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES FOR DRIVING ABOVE 100 MPH OR 160 KM/H
- COUPE: TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES FOR THE 128I
- COUPE: TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES FOR THE 135I
- CONVERTIBLE: TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES FOR THE 128I
- CONVERTIBLE: TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES FOR THE 135I
- TIRE IDENTIFICATION MARKS
- SPEED CODE LETTER
- TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
- TIRE AGE
- UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
- DOT QUALITY GRADES
- TREAD WEAR
- TRACTION
- RSC - RUN-FLAT TIRES
- M+S
- XL
- TIRE CONDITION
- MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH
- WHEEL/TIRE DAMAGE
- RUN-FLAT TIRES
- NEW WHEELS AND TIRES
- RETREADED TIRES
- CORRECT WHEELS AND TIRES
- WHEELS WITH TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR TPM ELECTRONICS
- RECOMMENDED TIRE BRANDS
- SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS OF WINTER TIRES
- PAY ATTENTION TO SPEED
- STORAGE
- SWAPPING WHEELS BETWEEN AXLES
- SNOW CHAINS
- UNDER THE HOOD
- HOOD
- IMPORTANT PARTS OF THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
- ENGINE OIL
- CHECKING OIL LEVEL
- DISPLAY VIA IDRIVE
- POSSIBLE MESSAGES
- OIL CHANGE
- SPECIFIED ENGINE OILS
- VISCOSITY RATINGS
- COOLANT
- CHECKING COOLANT LEVEL
- MAINTENANCE
- BMW MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
- CONDITION BASED SERVICE CBS
- SERVICE DATA IN THE REMOTE CONTROL
- SERVICE AND WARRANTY INFORMATION BOOKLET FOR US MODELS AND WARRANTY AND SERVICE GUIDE BOOKLET FOR CANADIAN MODELS
- SOCKET FOR ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS OBD
- EXHAUST EMISSION VALUES
- EVENT DATA RECORDERS
- CARE PRODUCTS
- EXTERIOR CARE
- WASHING THE VEHICLE
- AUTOMATIC CAR WASHES
- STEAM JETS / HIGH-PRESSURE WASHERS
- MANUAL CAR WASH
- HEADLAMPS
- WIPER BLADES
- CONVERTIBLE TOP CARE
- PAINTWORK CARE
- REPAIRING PAINTWORK DAMAGE
- PRESERVATION
- RUBBER SEALS
- CHROME PARTS
- LIGHT-ALLOY WHEELS
- OUTSIDE SENSORS / CAMERAS
- INTERIOR CARE
- UPHOLSTERY / CLOTH TRIM
- LEATHER / LEATHER TRIM
- CARPETS / CARGO BAY
- INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS
- FINE WOOD PARTS
- INTERIOR SENSORS / CAMERAS
- DISPLAYS
- CD/DVD DRIVES
- VEHICLE STORAGE
- REPLACING COMPONENTS
- ONBOARD TOOL KIT
- LAMPS AND BULBS
- LIGHT-EMITTING DIODES LED
- XENON LAMPS
- REMOVING THE HEADLAMP COVER
- HALOGEN HEADLAMPS
- HALOGEN LOW BEAMS AND HIGH BEAMS
- PARKING LAMPS, ROADSIDE PARKING LAMPS
- XENON HEADLAMPS
- PARKING LAMPS, ROADSIDE PARKING LAMPS, DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
- CORNER-ILLUMINATING LAMPS
- TURN SIGNALS, FRONT
- TAIL LAMPS
- REPLACING TAIL LAMPS
- OUTER BRAKE LAMP
- INNER BRAKE LAMP, TURN SIGNAL, BACKUP LAMP AND BRAKE FORCE DISPLAY LAMP
- LICENSE PLATE LAMPS AND CENTER BRAKE LAMP
- CHANGING WHEELS
- JACK MOUNTING POINTS
- VEHICLE BATTERY
- BATTERY CARE
- CHARGING THE BATTERY
- DISPOSAL
- POWER FAILURE
- FUSES
- IN THE GLOVE COMPARTMENT
- GIVING AND RECEIVING ASSISTANCE
- EMERGENCY REQUEST
- SENDING AN EMERGENCY REQUEST
- FIRST AID POUCH
- WARNING TRIANGLE
- JUMP STARTING
- PREPARATION
- CONNECTING JUMPER CABLES
- TOW-STARTING, TOWING AWAY
- USING A TOW FITTING
- ACCESS TO SCREW THREAD
- BEING TOWED
- TOWING METHODS
- WITH A TOW BAR
- WITH A TOW ROPE
- WITH A TOW TRUCK
- TOW-STARTING
- TECHNICAL DATA
- ENGINE DATA
- DIMENSIONS
- WEIGHTS
- CURB WEIGHT
- APPROVED GROSS WEIGHT
- CAPACITIES
- SHORT COMMANDS FOR THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
- EVERYTHING FROM A-Z
- INDEX
- A
- B
- C
- D
- E
- F
- G
- H
- I
- J
- K
- L
- M
- N
- O
- P
- R
- S
- T
- U
- V
- W
- X
Brand : BMW
Model : 135i Convertible (2008)
Category : Automobile